JP7055782B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

In a pachinko gaming machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, a storage unit capable of storing a game medium supplied from a game island installed in a game field, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out the game medium, and a payout unit. Some have a guide passage forming portion for forming a guide passage for guiding the game medium supplied to the storage portion to the payout portion, and these storage portions and the guide passage forming portion are attached to the game frame by a screw member. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-96050

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion to the game frame, the screw member attached to the inside of the game island, and the like are disengaged to form the storage portion and the guidance passage. If it falls into the section, the screw member will be mixed into the payout device together with the game medium, and the game medium cannot be dispensed normally, the payout device will break down, or the screw member will be the player together with the game medium. There was a problem that it was sometimes paid out.

The present invention has been made focusing on such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a screw member from being mixed in a payout portion.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
A storage unit that can store game media,
A payout unit that can pay out game media,
A guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the payout portion.
A cover portion provided so as to cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion, and a cover portion.
Game frame and
Equipped with
The storage portion is arranged on the upper surface side of the predetermined portion of the game frame, and is arranged in close proximity to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that the screw member does not enter between the storage portion and the upper surface of the predetermined portion. ,
The cover portion is provided with a first predetermined limiting portion and a second predetermined limiting portion for restricting the falling of the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion into the guide passage forming portion.
In the first predetermined limiting portion and the second predetermined limiting portion, the game medium dropped on the cover portion does not stay, and the screw member dropped on the cover portion does not fall to the guide passage forming portion. It is configured to be able to stay on the cover portion (see FIGS. 8, 9, 19, and 20).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control board which concerns on a feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the storage area which concerns on the characteristic part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the moving image data and a text display process table which concerns on a feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display process table which concerns on a feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display control example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display setting information which concerns on a feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the text display example which concerns on the feature part 91AK, 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the screen display which concerns on a feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the drawing command for an effect which concerns on a feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the screen display which concerns on a feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect drawing composition processing which concerns on a feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the image processing which concerns on a feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the image display example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the reach effect content and the drawing processing pattern which concerns on a feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the drawing processing pattern which concerns on a feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the effect execution period which concerns on a feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production execution example which concerns on the feature part 01AK, 02AK. It is a front view which shows the pachinko gaming machine as a feature part 75SG. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine as a feature part 75SG. It is a front view which shows the game board of the pachinko gaming machine as a feature part 75SG. 10-3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10-3. It is a front view which shows the light guide plate device. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a sectional view taken along the line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing a main part of (B). (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which saw the structure of the 1st effect unit diagonally from the front. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 10-7 (A), FIG. 10B is a sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 10-7 (A), and FIG. It is E cross-sectional view. (A) is a front view showing a base member, (B) is a front view showing an LED substrate, and (C) is a front view showing a cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. It is an enlarged view which shows the main part of FIG. 10-11 (B). (A) is a front view showing a variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a sectional view taken along the line FF of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing a main part of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main part of the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for comparing the 1st production unit and the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the similar color. (A) is a front view showing the second effect unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second effect unit in a state where the cover member is removed. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line GG of FIG. 10-17 (A), and FIG. 10B is a sectional view taken along the line HH of FIG. 10-17 (A). (A) is a diagram for explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED substrate, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit. (A) is a front view which shows the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line II of FIG. 10-20, and FIG. 10B is a sectional view taken along the line JJ of FIG. 10-20. 10-20 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the visual appearance state of the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit. It is a figure which shows the effect mode when the 3rd effect unit and the 4th effect unit emit light. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state where the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing a state where the third effect unit is located at the effect position. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is a left side view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is a top view which shows the frame for the game machine to which the game board is attached. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the pachinko machine is seen from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the game board was removed from the game machine frame. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the attachment structure of the passage forming body to the frame for a game machine. It is an enlarged rear view which shows the upper part of the back of the frame for a game machine. (A) is a plan view which shows the 1st passage forming body, and (B) is a back view which shows the 1st passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 18A, FIG. 18B is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 18A, and FIG. 18C is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 18A. (A) is a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is an EE sectional view of (A), and (C) is an FF sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing a second cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along the line GG of (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along the line HG of (A). (A) is a plan view showing a third cover body, (B) is an II cross-sectional view of (A), (C) is a JJ cross-sectional view of (A), and (D) is a third cover body. The perspective view shown, (E) is the perspective view which shows the ball stop member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a first guide passage forming portion showing a state in which the ball stopping member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guiding passage forming portion showing a state in which the ball stopping member is in the second state. It is a vertical sectional view which shows. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame on which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK cross section of (A), and (C) is an LL cross section of (B). It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the ball tank part on the back surface of a game frame diagonally from the back. (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame, and (B) is a sectional view taken along the line MM of (A). It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the 1st guide passage forming part on the back surface of a game frame from diagonally behind. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guide passage forming part on the back surface of a game frame. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line NN of FIG. 29, (B) is a diagram showing a rotational state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along the line OO of FIG. 29. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP of FIG. 29, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ of FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR of FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS of FIG. 29. (A) is a staying state of the screw member when the ball fixing member is in the first state, (B) is a TT cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is a state when the ball fixing member is in the second state. The stagnant state of the screw member, (D) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line UU of (C). It is a vertical sectional view of the 1st guide passage forming part which shows the moving state of a screw member. It is a vertical sectional view of the 1st guide passage forming part which shows the moving state of the game ball on a cover part. (A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modified example, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the gaming machine in the feature part 053SG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface in the state which the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the connection mode of the low voltage component and the high voltage component mounted on the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the state which the game control board in Example 1 is housed in a board case. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1 and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on a solder surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation which the game control board in Example 1 is attached to a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation which the game control board in Example 1 is attached to a game machine. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the solder surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in relation to the connection between the game control microcomputer, the input circuit, and the output circuit on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in relation to the connection between the game control microcomputer, the input circuit, and the output circuit on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram relating to the connection between the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit in the game control board according to the second embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is the perspective view from the upper part of the specific electronic component, (B) is the lower part of the specific electronic component. It is a perspective view from. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which the specific electronic component is soldered to the game control board in Example 3. FIG.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 75SG001).
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player, and
Specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component, and
A translucent member (for example, a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a translucent member and is provided so that the player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are inconspicuous due to the specific members of similar colors, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
Predetermined electronic components (for example, first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) provided so as to be difficult or invisible to the player.
Predetermined members provided around the predetermined electronic components (for example, members for fixing the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and
Equipped with
The predetermined member is characterized in that it has a non-similar color to the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, for a predetermined electronic component that is difficult or invisible to the player, a general-purpose product can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined member, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the third embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect.
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) is provided.
The electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 303) is characterized in that it is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic component is inconspicuous because it is located away from the display means that the player pays attention to.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third embodiments.
A protrusion (for example, a protrusion 3A) provided above the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 603, 803) and protruding toward the player from the electronic component is provided.
The protrusion is characterized by being larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic component becomes a shadow of the protruding portion and becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment.
The electronic component (for example, LED substrate 603,803) and the specific member (for example, base member 601,801) are dark (for example, black) (variation example).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the electronic component is easily distracted by the shadow of the protruding portion, so that it becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth embodiments.
The specific member is characterized in that the color brightness or saturation is higher than that of the electronic component.
According to this feature, the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component, so that the electronic component can be made relatively inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth embodiments.
The translucent member (for example, cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, base member 301). ) (See Fig. 10-12)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative patterns make the electronic components inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
The electronic component (for example, LED board 303) is a circuit board.
The specific member (for example, the base member 301) has a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 341) that has at least a part in common with the aspect of the circuit pattern (for example, the printed wiring 320) formed on the circuit board. It is provided (see Fig. 10-12).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the ninth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth aspect.
The specific member (for example, the base member 301) has a predetermined region (for example, rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that can be visually recognized from the player side without passing through the translucent member (for example, the cover member 302). ,
In the predetermined area, a predetermined decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 341) having the same or similar aspect as the decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 331) of the translucent member is provided (see FIG. 10-12).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to understand that the specific member and the translucent member are different members.

The gaming machine of the tenth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
A decorative portion (for example, a decorative portion 420) provided at a position corresponding to a boundary (for example, the boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 403) and the specific member (for example, the base member 401) is provided. (See Fig. 10-19)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic component is arranged so as to be visible to the player, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is obscured by the decorative portion, so that the electronic component is inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design is increased. Can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the eleventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect.
The decorative part includes a plurality of decorative parts.
A plurality of predetermined decorative portions are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member.
The plurality of decorative portions are characterized in that the number is larger than that of the plurality of predetermined decorative portions.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is obscured by the plurality of decorative portions, so that the electronic component is inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 11.
The translucent member (for example, the cover member 402) corresponds to a boundary corresponding region (for example, the boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 403) and the specific member (for example, the base member 401). It has (for example, a convex portion 410) and a boundary non-corresponding region (for example, a region other than the convex portion 410) that does not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member.
The translucency of the boundary-corresponding region is characterized by being lower than the translucency of the non-boundary-corresponding region.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member through the boundary corresponding area, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eleventh or the twelfth aspect.
A logotype (for example, the letter "V") is displayed on the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) (see FIG. 10-19).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the 14th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 11th to 13th embodiments.
The electronic component (for example, LED substrate 403) includes a light emitting means (for example, a second effect LED 404A) capable of causing the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) to emit light (see FIG. 10-18).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous due to light emission, the player is less likely to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of the form 15 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 14.
The light emitting means (for example, the second effect LED 404A) is provided so that the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) can emit surface light (for example, the light from the second effect LED 404A is an inner lens). The entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light by being emitted substantially evenly forward from the entire front surface of the 405 and incident on the region corresponding to the convex portion 410.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous due to surface emission, the player is less likely to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of the 16th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 15th embodiments.
Around the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 803) and the specific member (for example, base member 801), an effect means (for example, a third effect unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic component and the specific member is provided. Provided (see Fig. 10-20)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the visibility of the effect means is higher than the visibility of the electronic components, so that the electronic components are less noticeable, which increases the degree of freedom in design. be able to.

The gaming machine of the form 17 is the gaming machine according to the form 16.
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) is provided on the player side (front side) of the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of the 18th form is the gaming machine according to the 16th or 17th form.
The effect unit (for example, the light emitting effect unit 630) provided so as to be visible to the player in the effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) is larger than the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 803) (FIG. 10). -20)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of the form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 16 to 18.
The effect unit (for example, the light emitting effect unit 630) provided so as to be visible to the player in the effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) is more visible than the color of the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 803). Is characterized by its high color.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of the form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 16 to 19.
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) has light emitting means (for example, third effect LEDs 604A, 604B) capable of irradiating light toward the player side (see FIG. 10-21 (A)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the effect means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of the 21st embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 20th aspects.
Further, a specific translucent member (for example, a cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) which is a translucent member and is provided at a position different from the translucent member is further provided.
The transmittance (for example, XA%, XB%) that transmits the light that has entered the translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) in a predetermined direction (for example, the T direction) has entered the specific translucent member. It is lower than the transmittance (for example, Y%) that transmits light in the predetermined direction (see FIG. 10-14).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the translucency of the translucent member is lower than the translucency of the specific translucent member, so that the electronic components are inconspicuous. The degree of freedom can be increased.

The gaming machine of the form 22 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 21.
The plate thickness of the translucent member (for example, the front-rear dimension L1A and L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the plate thickness of the specific translucent member (for example, the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIG. 10-14). )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the translucency of the translucent member is lowered, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of the embodiments 1 to 22.
The translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color.
The predetermined color is characterized in that it is a similar color to the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, base member 301).
According to this feature, the translucent member is assimilated with the electronic component or the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes inconspicuous.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is performed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area), a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and the starting winning opening door is in the closed position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the second starting winning opening can be used. It becomes a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as a closed state in which the second start winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening because the starting winning opening door is in the open position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second). It is also said that the starting winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the one provided with an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of open modes (number of rounds and open upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,") which is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including the jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Upon receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying, for example, that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 indicates that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. , Display the screen for notification. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of the jackpot) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (details are provided). See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings for starting control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the feature part regarding the set value)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. ing. Further, although not shown, the main board 11 has a lock switch for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, and a jackpot described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value such as a winning probability (ball ejection rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of a gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

The operation unit, such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by the staff of the game hall or the like, is provided in the setting changeover main body part and is housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case so that the lock switch and the setting changeover switch can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case containing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch and the setting changeover switch are extremely difficult or impossible to operate when the gaming machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame using a predetermined door key. .. Further, since the lock switch requires the operation of the setting key possessed by the staff of the game hall or the like, only the administrator who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF by using a setting key. In the present embodiment, the mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged on the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is opened. This is the front of the pachinko machine, which is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As described above, the display monitor is arranged in front of the gaming board 2 when the back surface side of the gaming board 2 is visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is open. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. .. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor can be lit or blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

As a predetermined position of the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a gaming information display unit may be provided at a lower left position of the gaming area. A round display, a right-handed lamp, a probability variation lamp, and a time saving lamp are collectively arranged in the game information display unit. The round display can display the number of rounds and the type of big hit in the big hit game during the big hit game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy high-base state as a time-saving state and a big hit game state. The probabilistic lamp lights up when it is in the probabilistic state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time saving state is reached. The round display is composed of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. Further, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the game field side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the game field side. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the jackpot probability may change depending on the set value, and although the jackpot probability is constant, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state changes depending on the set value. May be good. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

(Explanation of feature units 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 8-1 shows configuration examples of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 with respect to the feature portions 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 8-1, various circuits such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the input circuit 91AK121, the memory controller 91AK122, the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM91AK124, the RAM91AK125, and the watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the effect control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP91AK132, an audio processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The voice processing circuit 91AK133 includes a voice decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control command received from the main board 11, and thereby decorates the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the like. An integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling the execution of an effect using a part or all of a plurality of effect devices such as an LED for effect and a movable member for effect such as a movable body 32 is integrated on one chip may be used. .. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, VDP91AK132, and a built-in memory 91AK136, while a part or all of the sound processing circuit 91AK133, the lamp control circuit 91AK134, and the motor control circuit 91AK135 is a effect control microprocessor. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the stored data of the effect data memory 91AK123 in response to the request signal supplied from the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 stores in advance the effect data that can be used to execute the effect using the effect device, such as various image data indicating the display image in the image display device 5. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, character image data which is sprite image data which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative patterns variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It suffices if it is prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, arbitrary character images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, etc., and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. You just have to. As the still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the audio data used for the audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the lamp drive data used for lighting drive the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of motor drive data used for rotationally driving a drive motor that operates a movable member such as a movable body 32. The effect data memory 91AK123 may be any non-volatile semiconductor memory such as a NAND flash memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten. However, the effect data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device in a normal use state in which the progress of the effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled.

The ROM 91AK 124 stores a computer program for effect control, fixed data, and the like. The RAM 91AK 125 provides a work area for the CPU 91AK 131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of the built-in register, and becomes a time-out signal when a time-out occurs after the start time (time-out time) has elapsed. Generate a signal. The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. Due to the generation of the time-out signal, the CPU 91AK131 is in the reset state, and the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 is restarted.

In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 91AK124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the effect operation. For example, in the ROM 91AK 124, a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination table, and various effect control patterns are configured. Pattern data etc. are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, and the like. It is composed of process data. A part or all of the effect control pattern and the effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a group of instructions in which a series of transfer instructions to be executed by VDP91AK132 are described according to the order of image processing and the like. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the effect using such a display list, it is sufficient that the electric components for the effect can be controlled in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK125 stores programs and various data used for controlling electrical components for production. The CPU 91AK 131 may be able to read the program or data stored in the RAM 91AK 125 in a reading time shorter than the reading time of the program or data stored in the ROM 91AK 124.

The CPU 91AK131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. At this time, the CPU 91AK131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the electric component for effect according to the program read from the ROM 91AK124. The effect control processing includes, for example, a fixed data reading process in which the CPU 91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM 91AK124, a variable data writing process in which the CPU91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM91AK125 and temporarily stores them, and various types in which the CPU91AK131 is temporarily stored in the RAM91AK125. Variable data read processing for reading variable data, reception processing for CPU91AK131 to receive input of various signals from the outside, transmission processing for CPU91AK131 to output various signals to the outside, or a part or all of these processes. May be good.

The VDP91AK132 determines the control content of the image display in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the CPU91AK131, the register setting, and the like. For example, the VDP91AK132 controls to execute variable display of decorative patterns and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. The VDP91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction unit (instruction code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131, and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, the instruction group for display control included in the decoding result is supplied to the internal circuit of VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The voice control instruction group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The instruction group for lamp control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The instruction group for motor control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 inputs the moving image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, and outputs the video data and the audio data separately. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and outputs the data. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, perform decompression decoding, and then supply the character image renderer 91AK145 or the text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing that can adjust the hue, saturation, brightness, or a part or all of the hue, saturation, and brightness of the video shown in the video data, and temporarily stores the adjusted video data in the VRAM 91AK147. You may. The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the character image data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into a bitmap format and temporarily store the character image data in VRAM 91AK147. Even if the character image renderer 91AK145 executes an image conversion process for displaying the character image specified by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. The text image renderer 91AK146 is input with text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and is written and stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert text image data in vector format into a bitmap format and temporarily store it in VRAM 91AK147. Even if the text image renderer 91AK146 executes an image conversion process for displaying the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM91AK147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP91AK132. The VRAM 91AK147 may be provided with, for example, a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, a CG buffer, and the like. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data in which the display colors of characters and texts are defined when the drawing process by VDP91AK132 is executed, and temporarily stores the display data of the effect image created by the drawing process. It is used for storage. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting signals for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 together with a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided inside the VRAM 91AK 147 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM 91AK 147, such as the built-in memory 91AK 136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of the effect image created by the drawing process by VDP91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster) created by VDP91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons. Data) etc. In the frame buffer, for example, an actual display area for storing display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 and display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 are stored. It may include a virtual display area to be used. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data in the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. As a result, it may be output to the image display device 5.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. In the image display area, display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored. The display data of each effect image created by the drawing process is stored in the image drawing area. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched to each other each time a V blank occurs. The V blank occurs at a cycle of updating the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Every time the V blank is started, a V blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data of each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V-blank cycle (first drawing display period). At the same time as the drawing process is performed, this storage area is switched to the image display area in the next V blank cycle (second drawing display period). Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

The voice processing circuit 91AK133 generates a voice signal that enables voice output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The voice decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded voice data to generate a voice signal. Further, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory that can store audio data that is not included in the moving image data in advance. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123 or ROM 91AK124. The voice processing circuit 91AK133 may generate a voice signal by decompressing and decoding the voice data read from the voice data memory based on the instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls a lighting mode (light emitting mode) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP91AK132, and outputs the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) with respect to a drive motor that operably drives a movable member for production such as a movable body 32. The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP132, and outputs the motor control data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used for controlling the progress of the effect.

FIG. 8-2 shows a configuration example of the storage area for effect control according to the storage content. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, and 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, the built-in memory 91AK136, or a part or all of them. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores the effect control program and the effect control management data, and functions as a management area such as a program for effect control. For example, table data, which is configuration data of various tables prepared for CPU 91AK131 of the microprocessor 91AK100 for effect control to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting the effect control pattern, and the like are stored as management data in a storage area. It suffices if it is stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores display control programs and display control management data, and functions as a management area for display control programs and the like. For example, an image processing program prepared for VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, a display process table in which a procedure for displaying an effect image, etc. are defined are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. You just have to. The image processing program may include a program for converting image data in vector format into image data in bitmap format. The image processing program may include a program that generates a text image in bitmap format based on the text described using the character code and the font data.

The storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image-related data including moving image data and related data. For the moving image data, image compression information including a reference image and a predicted image is generated by compression coding processing such as motion compensation prediction coding using a multi-frame image as an original image, and is multiplexed with audio data. It may be a multi-encoded stream. The moving image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM 11 may include table data and data files constituting the moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is a display control process that can change the display content and display mode of the moving image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the elapsed time as the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image that is reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is a mode and a form when the moving image is reproduced and displayed, including the display style and display layout of the moving image. The table data and data files constituting the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM12 stores character image-related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be any still image data in which an arbitrary character image showing a plurality of types of decorative patterns, people, figures, symbols, etc. is described in a vector format or a bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files constituting the character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing in which the display content and display mode of the character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 can be changed according to the elapsed time as the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is a mode or mode for displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the character image. The table data and data files constituting the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM13 stores text image-related data including text image data and its related data. The text image-related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted into the glyph of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect contours for each character used to display a text image. be. The text image-related data may include vector font data or stroke font data in place of the outline font data or together with the outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into glyphs of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying straight line or curve parameters for each character used to display a text image. .. Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is scaled up or down. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, and is an arbitrarily set word such as a sentence, a paragraph, a sentence, a phrase, a word, or a combination of a part or all of them. Any unit may be used as long as it can be recognized. Further, the text image data may indicate a text image consisting of only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, subtitles, other information transmission characters, or the like. It may indicate decorative characters. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data may be stored in either the ROM 91AK 124 or the built-in memory 91AK 136 because the VDP91AK132 is used when the image processing program is executed. As described above, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the effect data memory 91AK123 and the ROM 91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in a part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, and built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM 13 may include table data and data files constituting the text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing in which the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 can be changed according to the elapsed time as the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. Be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is a mode and a mode for displaying a character image including a display style and a display layout of the text image. The table data and data files constituting the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM14 stores voice-related data including voice data and related data. The audio data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 can be reproduced and output as the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses, unlike the audio that is reproduced and output in synchronization with the image in the effect of displaying the moving image. Anything that does. The voice-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM 14 may include table data and data files constituting the voice output process table. The voice output process table is used for voice control processing in which the voices such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R can be changed according to the elapsed time as the production in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. The table data and data files constituting the audio output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as the effect control management data.

In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142, and is separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes, for example, conversion processing of video data according to a display mode including a moving image display style and a display layout, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the moving image data which is the stored data of the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. When the text image data is compressed and encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 and then input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes, for example, a text image data conversion process according to a display mode including a text image display style and a display layout, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the text image is controlled by using the text image data which is the storage data of the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 8-3 shows an example of determining the moving image data and the text display process table according to the reach effect content. In the reach effect of super reach such as SP reach A and SP reach B, it is possible to execute an effect by displaying a moving image using moving image data and an effect by displaying a text image using text image data. The period in which the effect by displaying the moving image is executed and the period in which the effect by displaying the text image is executed may be partially or wholly the same period or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined, for example.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 8-3, the moving image data is determined to be one of 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 according to the reach effect content, and is determined to be one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12. Will be done. Of these, the moving image data is determined in a one-to-one correspondence with the reach effect content. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, in the text display process table, there are cases where it can be determined in common even with different reach effect contents, and there are cases where it cannot be determined. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or. In the case of "SP reach B (loss)", it cannot be determined. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or. In the case of "SP reach A (loss)", it cannot be determined. As described above, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the reach effect of the SP reach A is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of the text image when the reach effect of the SP reach B is executed.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed, and when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (missing)", the moving image is executed. An effect by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. It can be displayed. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (missing)", the moving image is executed. An effect by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD02 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD12. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 8-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used corresponding to the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. 8-4 (A2) shows the reach of SP reach A. A configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in response to the effect is shown. FIG. 8-4 (B) shows a configuration example of the text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used corresponding to the reach effect of SP reach B.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. The text display process table may include a text image designation information and a text display setting information set in association with each other in a single text display period. The text display period specifies a start time for starting the display and an end time for ending the display for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time in the text display period may be specified by using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image in the reach effect, or by using the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. You may. However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the moving image, the start time and end time in the text display period are used using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image. It is desirable to specify. Since the elapsed time from the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the reach mode, the moving image even if it is a common reach effect due to the variable display effect before the variable display becomes the reach mode. The timing at which the display of is started may differ. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time in the text display period are specified using the elapsed time from the start of displaying the moving image, the timing at which the specific image in the moving image is displayed and the timing. The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the interlocking between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information specifies the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be any information that specifies the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information uses an arbitrary character code such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.), and the content of the text image to be displayed. May be the specified information. The text display setting information is information that specifies that the display mode of the text image can be set by the display style information, the display layout information, other metadata, and the like of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set as long as the text image designation information and the text display setting information can be set in association with each other during the text display period by using arbitrary table data.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of display control of a text image using a text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A1) shows a display control example in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 8-5 (A2) shows a display control example in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. .. FIG. 8-5 (B) shows a display control example in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the display of the moving image is started at the timing T00, and when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the timing T10 is used. At some point, the display of the moving image starts.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A1), the text image designation information 91AKA01 in the text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Is displayed. All of the timings T02 to T04 are included in the period from the timing T01 to the timing T05. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Display the text image specified by. The timing T08 is a timing that arrives after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A2), the text image designation information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Is displayed. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Display the text image specified by.

In this way, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a second text display period different from the first text display period and a period partially or wholly in common. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second from timing T04 to timing T05. 3 The text display period is set to be included. In this case, in the first text display period, a part of the period is common to the second text display period, and the other part of the period is common to the third text display period. As described above, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, in the second text display period, the entire period is common to the first text display period, and in the third text display period, the entire period is common to the first text display period. As described above, the second text display period includes the entire period in the first text display period, and the third text display period includes the entire period in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include a period in which a part is common to each other. As described above, the first text display period may include a part of the second text display period, and the second text display period may include a part of the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may include the entire period in the second text display period, and the second text display period may include the entire period in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, different text images specified by the text image designation information can be displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. This makes it possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image during the display period of the text image added to the moving image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. After the second text display period ends at the timing T03, as the third text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text The text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. With such a setting, only the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. .. On the other hand, in the period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, which is common to the second text display period in the first text display period, the text image is designated for the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, in the period from the timing T04 to the timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image designation information is displayed on the display of the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is such that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed depending on the determination result of the text display process table. It will be possible to change.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the common text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05, and the text from the timing T02 to the timing T03 is displayed. The text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and the text is displayed in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. Image designation information 91 The text image designated by AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to the common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image to be displayed is different in at least a part of a plurality of text display periods, so that the text image can be displayed. The components can be changed. When a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, even if the text image to be displayed is different in the entire plurality of text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. good. When a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, if the start time, end time, and part or all of the period length are different for multiple text display periods, depending on the determination result of the text display process table. You may let me. In this way, a part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to the moving image of 1 may be changed, or a part or all of the text image added to the moving image of 1 can be changed. May be.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), the text image designation information 91AKA21 is in the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. Display the text image specified by. Further, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T12, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA23 in the text display period from the timing T13 to the timing T14. Is displayed. The timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. After the timing T15 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T16 to the timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T18 to the timing T19. Display the text image specified by.

FIG. 8-6 shows a specific example of the text display setting information. The text display setting information is configured to include data corresponding to a plurality of fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. In the fontFamily field, the font family that is the font type can be set for the font of the characters included in the text image. In the fontSize field, you can set the font size that is the size to display the text image. The fontWeight field allows you to set the thickness of the characters contained in the text image. In the color field, the display color of the characters included in the text image can be set. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of characters in text images such as standard, italic, or italic. The textAlign field can set the alignment of characters included in the text image, such as right-justified, center-justified, and left-justified. The textDecoration field can be set to display decorations added to the text image, such as underlines, overlines, strikethroughs, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 8-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 8-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 8-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 8-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. The text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but is not included in the text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but is not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image specified by the text image designation information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 with the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. Can be displayed in. This makes it possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image during the display period of the text image added to the moving image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in the first text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05. It is displayed with the displayed display style and display layout. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 was set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02. It is displayed in the display style and display layout. After the second text display period ends at the timing T03, the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05 is designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 as the third text display period included in the first text display period. When the text image is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB03, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style set by the text display setting information 91AKAB13. Or may be displayed in the display layout. With such a setting, in the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period, only the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as text. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, in the period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, which is common to the second text display period in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the designated information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02. On the other hand, in the period from the timing T04 to the timing T05, which is common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the text image is designated by being added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. When the text image specified by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB03, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKAB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the displayed style and layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01, and the text display setting information 91AKAB02 It can be displayed with the display style and display layout set by. In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01, and the text display setting information 91AKAB03. It may be displayed with the display style and display layout set by. Alternatively, in the third text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is set to display the text, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01. Information 91 It may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by AKB13. As described above, in the first text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05, which is common to the second text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is used. In addition to displaying in one display mode, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be changed to a second display mode different from the first display mode and displayed. Of the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. In addition to displaying, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be changed to a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode and displayed. Alternatively, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is first displayed. In addition to displaying in a mode, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be changed to a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes and displayed. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, the part of the text image can be changed to a display mode different from that of the other text images and displayed. Further, after displaying the text image of the second display mode together with the text image of the first display mode, the text image of the second display mode is changed to the text image of the third display mode and displayed, and the second display. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed so that the text image of the mode may be changed to the text image of the fourth display mode and displayed.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), a text image is displayed in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image designated by the designated information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01. Further, in the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02. This makes it possible to display a common text image in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. Display. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T04 to the timing T05. This makes it possible to display different text images in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. Display. Further, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Further, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. As described above, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to the setting data based on the common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. Let me. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. In this way, even a common text image may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, the text image designation information and the text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least a part of the text image specification information and the text display setting information set in association with the plurality of text display periods can be set as common information. , Part or all information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the display color of the text image is set to change stepwise from # FF0040 to # 4000FF by the color field. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), text is displayed in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image of the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01 is displayed. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed in the text display period from the timing T11 to the timing T15. In these cases, when the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content which is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is the second component of the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. For example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changed even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information, depending on the reach effect content and the like. .. In this case, whether or not to change the display color of the text image at a different rate depending on whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, for example, whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be determined, or it may be determined to be one of a plurality of display colors. Further, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field is changed according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK131 even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP91AK132 may change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU91AK131, the register setting, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed by simply changing a part of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, so that the increase in the data capacity and the processing load can be prevented. , Various text images can be displayed. When changing the display color of the text image, other display styles may be changed accordingly. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image is easy for the player to see, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image is difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by the fontSize field is displayed so that the font size is larger than that when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white is displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be nice if it could be changed to. This makes it possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to see while suppressing the player's discomfort in displaying the text image.

FIG. 8-7 shows an execution example of an effect in which a text image is displayed using a text display process table. In this execution example, along with the moving image display when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the text image is displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. In the reach effect of SP reach A, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01, and when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the moving image is displayed. A moving image is displayed using the data 91AKD11. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a production display that is a battle effect in which a common ally character and an enemy character compete with each other is performed, for example, the battle result is Until the timing of notification, the contents of the common effect display may be used. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is high, and when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is high. Will be higher. Therefore, in the reach effect of SP reach A, even during the moving image display period, which is the content of the common effect display, the jackpot expectation is different depending on the display content of the text image according to the text display process table. Can be done.

The effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7 (A) is an effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and corresponds to the text display period from the timing T01 to the timing T05, and the text image designation information 91AKA01. The text image specified by is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 has, for example, the origin coordinates (300,30) as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB01. The font family is classified as AA_gothic in Gothic typeface, the font size is 48px, the font thickness is bold corresponding to bold, the display color of the text image changes gradually from # FF0040 to # 4000FF, The components in the text image display are controlled so that the background display color is # CCF0F0, the font style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the font alignment is centered, and the font decoration is unset. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, if the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP91AK132 executes an image conversion process for displaying a text image in a display mode including a display style and a display layout specified by the text display designation information. good.

Further, in the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 corresponds to the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03, and the text image is the text display setting information 91AKAB02. It is displayed in the display mode set by. In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins ..." specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 has, for example, the origin coordinate (250,600) as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB02. ), Font family is BB_mincho, a typeface classified into Mincho typeface, font size is 36px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color is #FFFFFF, background display color is # 220C0C , The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the normal font corresponding to the normal character style, the character arrangement is left-justified, and the character decoration is not set.

The effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B1) includes an effect content different from that of the text display process table 91AKT02 when the text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKA3. In this case, the text image indicating the line "chance !!" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 has, for example, the origin coordinate (250,600) and the font family as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB03. Typeface classified into Gothic typeface called CC_gothic, font size is 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color is # 000000, background display color is #FFFFFF, character style is normal The components in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding normal typeface, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is unset. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and has a font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. The color, character style, and character arrangement have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image designation information, some of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information may be changed and displayed. ..

The effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2) includes an effect content different from that of the text display process table 91AKT01 when the text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Gekiatsu" specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 has, for example, the origin coordinate (250,600) and the font family DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKAB13. Typeface classified as Mincho typeface, font size is 72px, character thickness is bold corresponding to bold, text image display color is gold corresponding to "gold", background display color is # 000000, The components in the text image are controlled so that the character style is a normal typeface corresponding to normal, the character arrangement is in the center, and the character decoration is the effect display setting for golden display by effect_gold. This text image has only the origin coordinates in common as compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and has a font family, a font size, a character thickness, a text image display color, and a background display color. The character style, character arrangement, and character decoration have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed are individually set among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all the settings including the origin coordinates are changed. In this way, when the text image designated by the text image designation information is displayed, all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information may be changed and displayed. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, if 1 data is changed and displayed among the data corresponding to multiple fields included in the text display setting information, 1 data is displayed. Other data associated in advance may be changed and displayed. For example, when the display color of the text image is changed to the gold color corresponding to "gold" and displayed, it is sufficient that the character decoration can be changed to the effect display setting for the gold color display by effect_gold and displayed.

As for the display color and background display color of the text image, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), for example, the brightness (gradation) is any one of "0" to "255". It can be set in 256 steps so that it becomes a level. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the color field and the backgroundColor field has a data format common to the field data constituting the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying the character image, for example. You just have to. Further, the origin coordinates when displaying a text image can be set by a combination of the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the origin field may have a data format common to the field data constituting the origin field, for example, in the character display setting information. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is common data with the field data included in the setting information used for displaying the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient that the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed by using the information common to the effect image different from the text image. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

The font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontFamily field may be any unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Further, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient that the character size can be set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontSize field corresponds to the field data constituting the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is different from the field data included in the setting information used for displaying the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, by using unique information that is not used in the effect image different from the text image. May be good. This makes it possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, to display various text images.

When, for example, a gold color corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration is the effect display setting for the gold color display by effect_gold. When "gold" is set by the color field in the text display setting information, effect_gold is set by the textDecoration field to display a glossy text image and display gold around the text image. It is possible to add an effect image for display. In the effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2), when a specific text image indicating a line of "super hot" is designated by the text image designation information 91A13, the text display setting information 91AKB13 is used for gold display. By setting the display style of, the specific text image showing the line "super hot" is displayed with gloss, and the effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. .. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the effect by the text image display.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the effect of the moving image display using the moving image data is executed, the effect of the text image display using the text image data is added to make it easier for the player to recognize the effect content. Therefore, it becomes easy to provide information that is different from the content of the production. In this case, in the data configuration in which the text image data is compressed, encoded, and multiplexed as the video data included in the moving image data, the contour is displayed in the text image display using the text image data that has been decompressed and decoded and reproduced. May cause problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality. Further, when different moving image data are prepared according to the display content of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data capacity of the moving image data tends to increase, and the processing load of the image data also increases. It will be easier. When a special compression coding process or decompression / decoding process is executed in order to prevent deterioration of the display quality in the text image display, the processing load of the image data may further increase.

In the feature units 91AK and 92AK, when the effect of moving image display using the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, the effect of displaying the text image using the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily display various text images with high quality, and it becomes easy for the player to recognize the contents of the production. In addition, since the effect of displaying the text image using the text image data stored separately from the moving image data is added, the data capacity of the moving image data increases and the processing load of the image data increases. , Appropriate display control that can be prevented as much as possible becomes possible.

The text image display added to the moving image display using the moving image data is controlled by using the text display process table. Similarly, the moving image display is controlled using the moving image display process table, the character image display is controlled using the character display process table, and the audio output is controlled using the audio output process data. In the text display process table, the text image designation information and the text display setting information are set in association with each other in a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information specifies the display content of the text image according to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as the second component related to the text image. In the VDP91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 displays the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to execute image conversion processing for this purpose. As a result, in the display period of the text image added to the moving image 1, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component are changed according to the elapsed time and the like. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to the moving image of 1, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and the data capacity and processing load can be increased. Appropriate display control is possible so that growth is prevented.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 was used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 was executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (loss)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. Further, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is displayed when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. It is possible to add and display the used text image. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is used when the effect by moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. It is possible to add a text image and display it. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data related to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, to a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By adding a text image using common data to multiple moving images and making it displayable, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and the increase in data capacity and processing load is prevented. Appropriate display control is possible.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images indicating the line "super hot" are provided by the text image designation information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style and the like may be changed and displayed at the timing of. A text image showing the line "super hot" corresponds to a specific first component group, for example, a text image whose display content suggests that the display result of variable display has a high rate of "big hit". It may be a text image. In this way, when displaying the specific text image corresponding to the specific first component group, the second component such as the display mode related to the specific text image may be changed at a plurality of timings.

FIG. 8-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of a text image showing a line of "super hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and the character decoration is not set in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text from timing T041 to timing T042 is set. In the display period, the display color is gold and the character decoration is not set, and in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the character decoration is the effect display setting for gold display. As a display style of text images common to the text display period up to timing T04 and timing T05, the font family is classified into the Mincho typeface called DD_mincho by the fontFamily field, and the font size is 72px by the fontSize field. It is set.

FIG. 8-8 (A) shows a case where a text image of a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to black corresponding to # 000000 by the color field, and the character decoration is set to no setting corresponding to none by the text Decoration field. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is black and the character decoration is not set.

FIG. 8-8 (B) shows a case where a text image with a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold" by the color field, and the character decoration is set to no setting corresponding to none by the text Decoration field. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, it is possible to display a glossy text image by, for example, displaying a gradation of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the golden display.

FIG. 8-8 (C) shows a case where a text image of a line of "super hot" is displayed in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image in this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the text Decoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to effect_gold. Will be done. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "super hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the character decoration is the effect display setting for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the text decoration of the text image is set to the effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the outline in the text image It is possible to add an effect image around a text image and display it by displaying colors such as and shadows, border display by bevel and embossing, layer styles that add brilliance, and some or all combinations of these. As a result, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, by adding an effect image around the text image and displaying it, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the golden display, and the game for displaying the text image. It can enhance the impression of the person.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image is separated from the other part by the text image designation information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. It may be displayed in a different display style. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins ...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 displays a part of the text image "character" in the text information indicating the line "If this character wins ..." with a display color and background display of the text image different from the other parts. You can set the color and character style.

FIG. 8-9 shows a display example in which a part of the text image has a display style different from that of the other parts. In this display example, a part of the text image "Character" is displayed so that the display color is white, the background display color is black, and the character style is oblique, and the other part of the text image is displayed in black. Display so that the background display color is white and the character style is normal. In the text display setting information 91AKB02, the display color of the text image corresponds to #FFFFFF by the color field, and the background display color corresponds to black by the backgroundColor field, corresponding to a part of the text image called "character". The fontStyle field sets the italics whose character style corresponds to italic. Further, the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to other parts of the text image, the display color of the text image is black corresponding to # 000000 by the color field, the background display color is white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the fontStyle field is used. Set the normal body whose character style corresponds to normal. As a result, by displaying a part of the text image in a display style different from that of the other parts, the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

In the display of a text image constituting a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a part to be displayed in a display style different from other parts may be changed according to the progress of the effect by the moving image display. For example, when a musical piece is played or a dialogue is played back along with a moving image display, a part of the text image corresponding to the progress is displayed in a display style different from other parts such as a specific color display or a highlight display. You may let me. The display style may be changed so that a part of the text image is faded in or faded out according to the situation in which the performance of the music or the voice reproduction of the dialogue progresses. A part of the text image to be displayed in a display style different from other parts is changed according to the elapsed time in any production execution, not limited to the situation where the music performance or the voice reproduction of the dialogue progresses with the moving image display. It may be possible. As a result, in the display of the text image, the part to be displayed in a display style different from the other parts is changed according to the progress of the effect, so that the impression of the player on the display of the text image can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to be able to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, in the display period of the text image added to the moving image 1, the display content of the text image as the first component, the display mode of the text image as the second component, the elapsed time, etc. One of the display control that can be changed according to the display and the display control that can be displayed by adding a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images is executed. And the other may not be executed. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be capable of changing any component with respect to the display content and display mode of the text image, for example. It is possible to change any component related to the display of the text image in place of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image. You may. For example, the time interval and movement width to update the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the enlargement and reduction ratio when displaying a text image enlarged or reduced, and these enlargement and reduction ratios according to the elapsed time. It suffices if any component that can be set regarding the display of the text image, such as the time interval for updating the enlargement ratio and the reduction ratio and the amount of change, can be changed.

When displaying a text image corresponding to a common display content, the one that changes the display mode of the text image is the text image set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6 (A). It is not limited to those that change the display color, and any display style, display layout, and other display modes may be changed. For example, in the corresponding text display period, the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is replaced with the display color of the text image, or in addition to the display color of the text image, the origin coordinates, the font family, and the like. Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, and a combination of some or all of these may be changed. The text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be capable of changing the display mode different from the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. ..

The text image data is not limited to the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least a part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. Text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as grass type and writing style, is multiplexed or compressed as part of the moving image data, and the video data separated from this moving image data is decompressed. It may be possible to display a text image of a specific aspect by decoding or the like. In this case, the data relating to the text image of the specific aspect is included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11. As described above, the data related to the text image includes the specific text image-related data included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11 and the normal text image-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13. You may.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table is composed of field data corresponding to a part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. It may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 are specified by the text image designation information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read out without using the font data. , The corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, since the text display setting information does not require field data related to font settings, it may be configured without including field data related to font settings such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data regarding the text display setting, for example, textSize.

As the scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13, only the data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prepared, for example, general-purpose Japan. Data corresponding to a text image, such as word font data, which is not limited to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko game machine 1 may be prepared. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, it is possible to prevent the data capacity from increasing when the text image used in the display effect is small. When general-purpose font data corresponding to a text image not limited to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the font data can be easily reused. It is possible to reduce the burden, and it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity when a large amount of text images are used in the display effect.

As the second component of the text image, the specific text image whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at multiple timings is not limited to the text image showing the line "super hot". , Any text image preset as a specific text image corresponding to the specific first component group may be used. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, a text image prepared in advance for displaying the lyrics of a musical piece or a text image prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of a moving image may be used as a specific text image. In this way, a plurality of second components such as a display mode are provided for a specific text image corresponding to an audio effect or a display effect in which the effect content changes according to the elapsed time, such as a reproduction output of a music or a reproduction display of a moving image. It may be possible to change at the timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. May be used as a specific text image. Alternatively, the text image of the display content suggesting that the display result of the variable display is not limited to the text image of the display content suggesting that the ratio of "big hit" is high, and the ratio of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. May be used as a specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the big hit game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. In addition, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of first rounds (for example, "15") that is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7"), and it can be executed in a time-saving state. The upper limit of the variable display is the first number (for example, "100") which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probabilistic state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The number of consecutive chans, which is one probability (for example, 1/20) and the number of times that the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled by the normal state, is larger than the number of consecutive chans (for example, "5"). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the number of consecutive chans (eg, "10").

The glossy text image is not limited to the case where the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold", for example, silver, copper, other metallic colors, or any color different from metallic colors. It may include the case where the display color of is set. The display color of the text image is not limited, and when displaying a preset specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with gloss, the textDecoration field etc. in the text display setting information should be set so that an effect image can be added around the text image and displayed. Just do it.

When the text image is displayed in rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as the coordinates in characters and the display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to the rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, a different display color can be changed for each in-character coordinate of the text image. , Rainbow display should be possible. For example, in the in-character coordinates of 1, the display color is red, then orange to yellow, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then bluish-purple to magenta, depending on the elapsed time. In addition, a plurality of display colors may be changed in sequence. At this time, considering that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that the change in blue becomes dark, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display is adjusted for each. The display color in the in-character coordinates may be changed in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and magenta. After reddish purple, it may return to red again and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in the display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of the text image is set to the rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the range of the in-character coordinates and display time of the text image specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the impression of the player on the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the effect by the text image display. The display of the text image may be displayed as a rainbow as a whole by sequentially changing different display colors according to the coordinates in the characters of the text image. Alternatively, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time by sequentially changing the common display color for all the in-character coordinates. In this way, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the in-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changed to different components depending on whether or not the player's specific motion is detected, or the plurality of components may be changed to different components at different ratios. It may be possible to change to either. The player's specific operation that makes it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image is, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operation rod of the stick controller 31A which is a V controller, and other operation rods of the stick controller 31A. It may be an arbitrary operation for tilting the push button 31b, or it may be an operation for pressing the push button 31b. It is not limited to those that can detect the movement of the player, and is based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, for example, the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, the shape, pattern, or color change of the detection target. Therefore, the first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable. A detection device capable of detecting an operation, change, difference, etc. in a detection target can change the state of the detection target mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. Any configuration that can be detected may be used. Alternatively, the result of shooting the detection target using a predetermined camera may be analyzed (video type motion capture) so that the state of the detection target can be detected. As an example of detecting the state of the detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

In the effect of displaying a text image using text image data, a part or all of the effect may be executed as a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the content of the reach effect is "SP reach A (big hit)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (= 35%) if the set value is 1, and 30/100 (= 30%) if the set value is 2. Yes, if the set value is 3, it is 25/100 (= 25%), if the set value is 4, it is 20/100 (= 20%), and if the set value is 5, it is 15/100 (=). 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to be 10/100 (= 10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (= 65%) if the set value is 1, and 70/100 (= 70%) if the set value is 2. Yes, if the set value is 3, it is 75/100 (= 75%), if the set value is 4, it is 80/100 (= 80%), and if the set value is 5, it is 85/100 (=). 85%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (= 90%). According to the setting of such a determination ratio, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect of displaying the text image according to any of the text display process patterns 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is executed. Is different depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, it is easy to perform an effect by displaying a text image according to the text display process table 91AKT01, and as the set value increases, the text corresponding to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed. The ratio of the effect by displaying the image is increased. Therefore, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" and the effect by displaying the text image according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous for the player. The degree of expectation, which is a setting value, is high.

In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the set value is the specific set value. If it is a specific set value, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a set value other than the specific set value, it may be provided with a setting suggestion effect that is not executed. As described above, in the range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, in the case of a special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a period other than the special period. In this case, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range of the special period. If it is a special period, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a period other than the special period, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range of the special period, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not satisfied. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the special condition is satisfied. If the special condition is satisfied, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if the special condition is not satisfied, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, as long as the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be satisfied according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of the determination or determination of the game, or the progress or history or the directing of the production in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be an arbitrary condition that can be satisfied according to the judgment or determination of. The effect is not limited to the setting suggestion effect, and any effect may be executed at different ratios depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, and whether such a condition is satisfied. The production mode may be determined at a different ratio depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different ratio depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied. .. Further, the arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset restriction condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. There may be a limit as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and it is difficult to be executed.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature unit 91AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B is added. For example, an effect executing means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area for storing data related to a moving image such as a storage area 91AKM11, and a second storage area for storing data related to a character image such as a storage area 91AKM13. And, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the stored data of the first storage area, for example, the moving image control means such as the video decoder 91AK143 and the moving image renderer 91AK144, and the stored data of the second storage area of the character image. A character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display is provided, and the storage data in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image designated by text image designation information. The character image control means includes data related to a plurality of character image components including, for example, a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information, and the character image control means is a character image added to one moving image. During the display period, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the first component and the second component can be changed. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

As shown in FIG. 8-8, for example, the character image control means can change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. May be good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means uses information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting the color field, and modifies the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, for example, a text image showing "super hot", and is related to the specific character image, for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-8. The second component may be changeable at a plurality of timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, for example, the character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The storage data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used for displaying a character image, such as outline font data. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as the character image component, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, a glossy character image is displayed and the character image is displayed. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

When a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as the character image component, for example, in a predetermined range such as the intra-character coordinates or the display time range, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in the order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature unit 92AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B is added. For example, an effect executing means such as an effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area for storing data related to a moving image such as a storage area 91AKM11, and a second storage area for storing data related to a character image such as a storage area 91AKM13. And, the display of the moving image is controlled by using the stored data of the first storage area, for example, the moving image control means such as the video decoder 91AK143 and the moving image renderer 91AK144, and the stored data of the second storage area of the character image. A character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display is provided, and the storage data in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image designated by text image designation information. And, for example, data relating to a plurality of character image components including a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information is included, and the character image control means is, for example, a moving image using moving image data 91AKD01. For the first moving image and the second moving image such as a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11, which is different from the first moving image, for example, a text image according to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, etc. , It is possible to add and display a character image using data related to a common character image. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

As shown in FIG. 8-8, for example, when the character image control means displays the character image corresponding to the common first component in the display period of the character image added to the moving image 1, the character image is displayed. The second component with respect to may be modifiable. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means uses information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting the color field, and modifies the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, for example, a text image showing "super hot", and is related to the specific character image, for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-8. The second component may be changeable at a plurality of timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, for example, the character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The storage data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used for displaying a character image, such as outline font data. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as the character image component, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, a glossy character image is displayed and the character image is displayed. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

When a special element such as when the color field is "rainbow" is set as the character image component, for example, in a predetermined range such as the intra-character coordinates or the display time range, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in the order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the effect by the character image display.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
The configuration relating to the feature portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configuration relating to the feature portion 60AK and the like. For example, the operation effect to be executed after the lapse of a predetermined period can be executed as the setting suggestion effect which is the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and the first component element in the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1. And the second component may be changeable, and for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image, a character image using data related to a common character image is used. It may be additionally displayable.

(Explanation of feature units 01AK and 02AK)
FIG. 9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of the screen display in the image display device 5 with respect to the feature units 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, an active display area 01AKA1, a first hold display area 01AKAB1, a second hold display area 01AKB2, and a small symbol display area 01AKC1 are provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the active display area 01AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display during execution. In the first hold display area 01AKB1, the hold display is performed by displaying the effect image corresponding to the variable display in which the execution is held, according to the first hold storage number. In the second hold display area 01AKB2, the hold display is performed by displaying the effect image corresponding to the variable display in which the execution is held, according to the second hold storage number. As described above, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first hold display area 01AKAB1, and the second hold display area 01AKAB2, active display or hold display that becomes a specific display based on the information related to the variable display is possible. The hold display in the first hold display area 01AKB1 is also referred to as "first hold display", and the hold display in the second hold display area 01AKB2 is also referred to as "second hold display".

In the first hold display area 01AKB1, for example, hold display associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" can be performed in order from the right end, and the first hold display is right-justified. It suffices if the display area is configured to be done. In the second hold display area 01AKB2, for example, hold display associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" can be performed in order from the left end, and the second hold display is left-justified. It suffices if the display area is configured to be done. In the active display area 01AKA1, the active display corresponding to the first hold display erased (digested) in the first hold display area 01AKAB1 is started in response to the start of the first special figure game, and the second special figure game is started. Corresponding to the start, the active display corresponding to the second hold display erased (digested) in the second hold display area 01AKB2 is started. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may be any one that has the same color and pattern as the first hold display and the second hold display. For example, the active display is the same as the first hold display and the second hold display. The effect image of may be displayed larger than each hold display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first hold display or the second hold display by executing the active display change effect. Further, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display so that the active display can be recognized separately from the first hold display and the second hold display.

A small symbol display area 01AKC1 is arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small symbol display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end portion on the screen of the image display device 5. ing. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, variable display of small symbols is executed corresponding to variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. The effect image showing the small pattern is smaller than the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and variable display can be executed in a manner in which a part or all of the identification information image showing the decorative pattern is common. Any image may be used as it is a reduced identification information image. For example, when the identification information image showing the decorative symbol includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small symbol corresponds to the same symbol number as the part showing the number included in the decorative symbol. Since it is an image showing the numbers and does not include a part showing a character, it suffices if a small symbol can be displayed in a simpler manner than an effect image showing a decorative symbol. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, by displaying the small symbols in a simple manner, it is sufficient to prevent the display contents and display results of the small symbols from being misidentified by the player. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small symbols as reduced identification information is performed, and a definite small symbol as a display result is derived. The effect image showing the small design may be displayed at a position that is always visible.

FIG. 9-2 shows a configuration example of a drawing command for an effect. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as drawing commands for a plurality of effects. The command 01AKG01 is a drawing command in which a color blend for blurring by bilinear sampling is instructed. Command 01AKG02 is a drawing command in which a color blend that inverts color information is instructed. The command 01AKG03 is a drawing command in which a color blend for blurring by changing the magnification is instructed. The command 01AKG04 is a drawing command in which a color blend for monochrome conversion is instructed. The command 01AKG05 is a drawing command in which a color blend for blurring by rotation is instructed. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command instructed to change the offset amount of the image position.

The drawing command for the effect may be prepared as one drawing command or may be prepared as a display list. The display list is a command group for performing drawing control, and can be created by the CPU91AK131 as a command sequence in which a plurality of commands for the VDP91AK132 are combined. In VDP91AK132, the drawing process can be executed in the order described in the display list. The drawing command for an effect may be composed of a combination of commands for setting a plurality of types of inter-pixel operations. For example, in a drawing command in which color blending is instructed, it may be possible to function as a drawing command for each effect by setting parameters according to the effect to be applied. For example, in the internal register of VDP91AK132, control data that specifies the calculation target included in the display list, numerical data that specifies parameters, and other register values are stored, and register values corresponding to execution commands are stored. Drawing according to the display list starts.

When color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling is executed in response to the command 01AKG01, a reduced image is generated by, for example, texture mapping of a bilinear interpolation method for image data. When generating this reduced image, a plurality of reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using the plurality of reduced images generated in this way, a composite reduced image is generated by performing a compositing process by color blending, for example, alpha blending. After that, by executing the enlargement processing of the combined reduced image, it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is blurred.

When executing a color blend that inverts the color information in response to the command 01AKG02, for example, the RGB value, which is the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in the image data, is set to the maximum value (for example, 255). Executes the difference calculation process of. For example, when the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", the color information can be inverted by obtaining 255-80 = 175. For the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", the color information included in the image data is included in the image data so that the image becomes an inverted image by executing the same difference calculation process. You can change to draw the generated image.

When executing a color blend for blurring by changing the magnification in response to the command 01AKG03, for example, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images are generated by scaling processing on the image data. At this time, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images having different magnifications such as an enlargement ratio and a reduction ratio of the image are generated. For example, for an image having a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images such as an image having a display magnification of 102% and an image having a display magnification of 104% are generated. Blurring is performed by performing a color blending composition process such as alpha blending using the plurality of enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and the image (original image) corresponding to the original image data. It is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so as to obtain the resulting image.

When executing a color blend for monochrome conversion corresponding to the command 01AKG04, for example, the monochrome conversion calculation process is executed for each pixel for the RGB value which is the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in the image data. do. In the monochrome conversion calculation process, the color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome by substituting the RGB value into the calculation formula for color tone conversion. By executing the monochrome conversion calculation process in this way, it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is monochrome-converted.

When executing color blending for blurring by rotation corresponding to the command 01AKG05, for example, a plurality of rotated images are generated by rotation calculation processing on the image data. At this time, a plurality of rotated images having different rotation angles of the images are generated. For example, for an image with a rotation angle of 0 °, two types of rotation images, such as an image with a rotation angle of 2 ° and an image with a rotation angle of 4 °, are generated. An image that has been blurred by performing a color blending composition process such as alpha blending using the plurality of rotated images generated in this way and the image (original image) corresponding to the original image data. It is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data so as to be.

When changing the offset amount of the image position corresponding to the command 01AKG06, the position information of the image is changed by, for example, the coordinate value conversion process for the image data. In the coordinate value conversion process, the position information when drawing an image, such as a UV coordinate value, is changed according to the offset amount set as a parameter. The UV coordinate value is given as a texture coordinate attribute value when mapping a texture to an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so that the image has a different texture arrangement.

As described above, the drawing command for the effect may include a command such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 that can draw the generated image by changing the color information included in the image data. Further, the drawing command for the effect may include a command such as command 01AKG06 that makes it possible to draw the generated image by changing the position information corresponding to the image data. In addition, the drawing command for the effect may include a command that makes it possible to draw the generated image by changing arbitrary attribute information regarding the image data.

Unlike these effect drawing commands, the CPU 91AK131 can also generate normal display drawing commands. The normal display drawing command executes a process of drawing an image corresponding to the image data without changing the color information included in the image data by not executing the composition process by color blending.

FIG. 9-3 shows a configuration example of a screen display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are divided into a plurality of display layers and drawn. The plurality of display layers have different display priorities set in advance as the display layer of the effect image. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Of these, the layer 01AKL1 is a display layer having the highest display priority, and an effect image showing a small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1 is drawn so as to be displayable. The layer 01AKL2 is a display layer having a display priority next to that of the layer 01AKL1, and draws an effect image corresponding to a hold display or an active display so as to be displayable. Further, the layer 01AKL2 may draw an effect image showing the pedestal below the active display so as to be displayable. The layer 01AKL3 is a display layer having a display priority next to that of the layer 01AKL2, and draws an effect image or the like used for a chance-up effect during reach to be displayable. Layer 01AKL4 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays effect images showing decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Draw as much as possible. The layer 01AKL5 is a display layer having the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image or the like as a background image so that it can be displayed.

A display layer in which a plurality of effect images are arranged is designated by, for example, display priority information included in a display list. In the display list, the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is designated as the first drawing target, and then the effect image arranged on each display layer is designated as the drawing target in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, 01AKL1. May be good. Further, for example, the image data of the effect images drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be set with a Z value which is a depth value used when each effect image is superimposed and drawn. By setting the Z value in the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be different depending on the drawing destination layer. For example, a display layer to which a small value is assigned as a Z value is arranged on the front side (front side) in the Z-axis direction as compared with a display layer to which a large value is assigned as a Z value, and the display priority of an image is higher. You can do it.

The VDP91AK132 may determine the display priority by performing a Z value comparison operation when writing the image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to the frame buffer provided in the VRAM91AK147 or the like. At this time, for example, the image data of the effect image having a small Z value is written in the frame buffer with priority over the image data of the effect image having a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which a small value as the Z value is assigned has a higher display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the large value as the Z value is assigned, and is seen by the player. It can be placed on the front side (front side). On the other hand, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which a large value as the Z value is assigned has a lower display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value as the Z value is assigned. It can be placed on the back side (rear side). The relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be the opposite, and the display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value is Z more than the display layer to which the small value is assigned as the Z value. It may be arranged on the front side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high.

In this way, the drawing process of the effect image corresponding to the display layer is executed, and the display image 01AKD1 including the plurality of effect images is generated. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after synthesizing the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 so as to be superimposing as a plurality of display layers having different display priorities.

Of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. In the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, the effect image can be drawn and displayed by a drawing process different from the effect images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer.

FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect drawing composition processing executed by VDP91AK132. The effect drawing synthesis process is executed when, for example, a display list including an effect drawing command is transferred based on the decoding result of the instruction code by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of VDP91AK132. When the effect drawing composition processing is started, the image data to be the target of the effect processing is read out (step 01AKS01). For example, in the VDP91AK132, the image data to be processed is read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, stored in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 or the like, and temporarily stored. The data transfer circuit of VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be processed from the buffer area of the effect data memory 91AK123 or VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and transfers the image data to the work area of VRAM91AK147. And memorize it. As the image data to be the target of the effect processing, the image data indicating the image to be drawn on any one of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which is a specific layer is specified by the drawing command among the plurality of display layers.

After that, the color blend for the effect is executed according to the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, the VDP91AK132 may execute, for example, any of the commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command by a part or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146. Color blending may be performed according to the above. In the case of the command 01AKG06, the coordinate value conversion process for changing the offset amount of the image position in the texture mapping may be executed.

Following step 01AKS02, images are combined and drawn corresponding to the low priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image obtained by performing the effect color blending in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of VRAM91AK147. For example, the VDP91AK132 is drawn on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command by a part or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146. Images may be stored in the frame buffer for screen display while being combined according to the display priority. As a result, the image drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by executing the effect color blend. can.

After step 01AKS03, images are combined and drawn corresponding to the high priority display layer (step 01AKS04). For example, in the VDP91AK132, the image data to be drawn is read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of the VRAM91AK147. An image in the low priority display layer has already been drawn in this frame buffer by step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123, the buffer area of VRAM91AK147, etc. by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and uses the VRAM91AK147 for screen display. It may be transferred to the frame buffer and stored. At this time, a part or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 draws on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, respectively. The images may be stored in the frame buffer for screen display while being combined according to the display priority. As the image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04, image data indicating an image to be drawn on any of layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, is specified by a drawing command among a plurality of display layers. As a result, the image drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer, is drawn for screen display without executing the effect color blend and without changing the color information of the image data. Can be done.

As described above, the VDP91AK132 can execute the drawing process for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 by using the image data stored in the predetermined area of the effect data memory 91AK123 or the VRAM91AK147. Further, by executing the effect drawing composition process, on the one hand, it is possible to change the color information included in the image data and draw the image drawn on any one of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which is a specific layer. On the other hand, the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can be drawn corresponding to the image data.

When the display list including the normal display drawing command is transferred without including the effect drawing command, the VDP91AK132 can execute the normal drawing composition process different from the effect drawing composition process. In the normal drawing composition process, the data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123, the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147, etc. by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and causes the VRAM91AK147 to read the image data to be drawn. Then, it may be transferred to a frame buffer for screen display and stored. At this time, a part or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 draws on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 by executing the inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, respectively. The images may be stored in the frame buffer for screen display while being combined according to the display priority. In this case, the color information of the image data and the like of the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 as special layers and the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 as specific layers are changed without executing the effect color blend. It can be drawn for screen display without.

FIG. 9-5 shows an execution example of image processing by the effect drawing composition processing. In this case, in the display list including the drawing command for the effect, as the image data to be processed by the effect, the image data 01AKD03 and the layer of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL3 among the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer. The image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the 01AKL4 and the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 are designated, respectively. When the VDP91AK132 reads out these image data in step 91AKS01 of the effect drawing / compositing process, the VDP91AK132 stores them in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 provided in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 or the like and temporarily stores them. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3, the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4, and the effect arranged on the layer 01AKL5. The image data 01AKD05 of the image is stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01.

Subsequently, the VDP91AK132 executes the effect color blending on the image data stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 by the effect drawing composition processing step 91AKS02. For example, when a color blend to be converted into monochrome is specified by the command 01AKG04 as a drawing command for an effect, the color information included in the image data is changed by executing the monochrome conversion calculation process. As a result, the color information of the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is changed so as to be the monochrome-converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is changed so as to be the monochrome-converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is changed so as to be the monochrome-converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2).

After that, the VDP91AK132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the low priority display layer by the effect drawing composition processing step 91AKS03. For example, the image data read from the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is written and stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02 in order from the display layer having the lowest display priority. At this time, the image data may be overwritten or the hidden surface may be erased according to the display priority. Of the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Remember with. The image data 01AKD14 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is read out second, superimposed on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02, written and synthesized. The image data 01AKD13 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is read out third, superimposed on the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02, written and synthesized.

Then, the VDP91AKD132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the high priority display layer by the effect drawing synthesis processing step 91AKS04. At this time, for example, by a drawing command included in the display list, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL2 is first designated as the image data to be drawn among the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer. , The image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is designated next. Each time the VDP91AK132 reads out these image data, the VDP91AK132 writes and stores the image data in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL2 is read first and superimposed on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02. Write and synthesize. The image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is finally read out, superimposed on the image data 01AKD02 and 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the mainframe buffer 01AKF02, and written and synthesized.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03 to 01AKD05 temporarily stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is converted into image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 whose color information is changed by the effect color blend, and the converted image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 has priority for display. It is written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the degree. After that, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written to the mainframe buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not executing the effect color blend. Therefore, in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, various production images such as a background image, a production image showing a decorative pattern, and a production image for increasing the chance during reach are displayed by drawing by a specific drawing process such as a color blend for effects. It is possible. On the other hand, in 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, the images are drawn by the normal drawing process without color blending for effects, and the effect image showing the hold display or the active display, the effect image showing the small pattern, and the like are used for the progress of the game. It is possible to display a related predetermined image.

FIG. 9-6 shows an image display example by executing the effect drawing composition process. The VDP91AK132 can display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by executing the effect drawing composition process when the display list including the effect drawing command is transferred. ..

FIG. 9-6 (A) shows an image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When the display list including the command 01AKG04 is transferred as the effect drawing command, the effect image drawn by the monochrome conversion calculation process among the effect color blends is displayed on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are the specific layers. It is possible. The monochrome conversion calculation process is a process for drawing with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM01, the specific drawing process is drawn by a monochrome conversion calculation process for drawing with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data. It is possible to display a production image. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM01, it is possible to draw a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-6 (B) shows an image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When the display list including the command 01AKG02 is transferred as the effect drawing command, the effect image drawn by the difference calculation process among the effect color blends can be displayed on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are the specific layers. Is. The difference calculation process is a process for converting and drawing the value of the color information included in the image data so as to be inverted by the difference from the maximum value. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM02, as the specific drawing process, the value of the color information included in the image data is converted and drawn by a difference calculation process or the like, and the image for production is drawn. Can be displayed. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM02, a predetermined image related to the progress of the game can be displayed by drawing without converting the value of the color information included in the image data by the normal drawing process.

In addition, when the display list including the command 01AKG01 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, perform the color blending process for blurring by bilinear sampling as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When the display list including the command 01AKG03 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, perform the image data by the composition process of performing the color blending for blurring by changing the magnification as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When the display list including the command 01AKG05 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, perform the color blending for blurring by rotation as the specific drawing process to the image data. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the included color information. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When the display list including the command 01AKG06 is transferred as the drawing command for the effect, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, perform the image data by the coordinate value conversion process for changing the offset amount of the image position as the specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be drawn without changing the position information corresponding to the image data by the normal drawing process, and may be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game.

By using these drawing commands for effects, the effect image drawn by changing the color information contained in the image data and the effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data can be displayed on a specific layer. Can be displayed. As a result, even if the image is drawn using common image data, the color information or the position information is changed and drawn by enabling different image processing to be executed according to the effect drawing command. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing.

FIG. 9-7 (A) shows an example of setting the jackpot reliability according to the reach effect content. The jackpot reliability for each reach effect is the ratio when the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state among the cases where each reach effect is executed. In this setting example, the jackpot reliability is set to be different depending on the reach effects of a plurality of types of super reach such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, by assigning a determination value to be compared with a random value for determining a variable display pattern, the ratio of the variable display result to be a "big hit" is set to be different according to a plurality of types of reach effects. You just have to.

SP reach A1 to A3 are reach productions of super reach with lower jackpot reliability than SP reach B, and are also referred to as "weak SP reach". SP reach B is a reach production of super reach with higher jackpot reliability than SP reach A1 to A3, and is also called "strong SP reach". For example, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP reach B is 80%. Is. Therefore, when the reach effect of the SP reach A1 is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" only once out of five times. On the other hand, when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" about 4 times out of 5 times. In the case of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach effect content may include an effect mode in which a part of the reach can recognize the commonality. For example, in the SP reach A1 to A3, a moving image common to each other may be reproduced and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, in SP reach A1 to A3, a common character image may be displayed as an animation. The reach effect content may include an effect mode in which the difference between the SP reach B and the SP reach A1 to A3 can be recognized. For example, in SP reach B, a moving image different from SP reach A1 to A3 may be reproduced and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, in SP reach B, a character image different from SP reach A1 to A3 may be displayed as an animation. The reach effect content may include an effect mode in which the difference from the other cases can be recognized in any one of the SP reach A1 to A3. For example, in SP reach A1 to A3, moving images different from each other may be reproduced and displayed as background images. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may display character images different from each other in animation. In addition, the effect mode in which the difference can be recognized is an arbitrary display on the screen of the image display device 5, an arbitrary sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and an arbitrary light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED. It may be due to light emission, arbitrary operation using a movable member for effect, or a combination of a part or all of them.

When a reach effect that becomes a super reach such as SP reach A1 to A3 is executed, a drawing effect by displaying an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command is included. As the drawing effect, one of a plurality of types of display effects capable of displaying an image drawn by different drawing processes according to the effect drawing command may be selected and executed. As a drawing effect, the image drawn according to the drawing command for the effect is not displayed, but even if it is possible to execute the display effect that can display the image drawn according to the drawing command different from the drawing command for the effect. good. When a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed, even if a case is included in which an effect by displaying an image drawn according to only a normal display drawing command is executed without executing a specific drawing effect. good.

FIG. 9-7 (B) shows a setting example of the drawing effect content according to the drawing effect pattern. In this setting example, as a plurality of drawing effect patterns, drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 are prepared in advance. A part or all of the drawing effect contents is different depending on these plurality of drawing effect patterns. The contents of the drawing effect include the presence / absence and type of the drawing effect by the effect display and the presence / absence of the drawing effect by the strobe display. A drawing effect that does not include an effect display or strobe display is also called a normal drawing effect. The drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is also called specific drawing effect.

The effect display is an effect display in which the color information included in the image data is changed and drawn when the drawing command for the effect is generated and transferred. The types of effect display include monochrome conversion effect and color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect uses the command 01AKG04 among the drawing commands for the effect to draw and display the effect image to which the monochrome conversion has been performed. The color information inversion effect uses command 02 among the effect drawing commands to draw and display an effect image in which the color information is inverted. As described above, the effect display may be any effect as long as it can display the effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. As the effect display, for example, the effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data may be displayed by using the command 01AKG06 among the drawing commands for the effect.

The strobe display is an effect display in which an image drawn using image data and a single color (for example, black or white) image with a setting different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly displayed for each predetermined number of frames. Is. The strobe display may be executed for an image drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. On the other hand, the strobe display may not be executed for the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 which are special layers. As described above, while the strobe display can be executed in the range of the image drawn on the specific layer, there may be a limitation as a limit that the strobe display is not executed in the range of the image drawn on the special layer. Along with the strobe display, a pause display may be displayed. The pause display is an effect display that gives the impression that the progress of the effect by displaying the image is paused by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. In addition, when the strobe display is not executed, the pause display may be performed.

FIG. 9-8 shows an example of determining a drawing effect pattern. For example, in the effect control process process of step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, a plurality of drawings are drawn at a ratio corresponding to the variable display result and the reach effect content as shown in FIG. 9-8. It suffices if one of the production patterns can be determined. When a variable display pattern corresponding to the reach effect of super reach is specified, the CPU 91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining a drawing effect pattern, and based on the random number value, according to the variable display result and the reach effect content, The drawing effect pattern may be determined by referring to the drawing effect pattern determination table.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-8, when the variable display result is "missing" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing is performed at a ratio of 60% (= 60/100). The effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (= 10/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKAB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (= 10/100), and 5% (= 5). The drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined at the ratio of / 100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at the ratio of 10% (= 10/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at the ratio of 5% = (5/100). Will be done. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 5% (= 5/100). The drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (= 10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKAB01 is determined at a rate of 15% (= 15/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 20% (= 20/100). The drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 20% (= 20/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 30% (= 30/100). Due to such a determination ratio, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" between the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and the drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state is different.

The drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern that does not execute a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect by effect display or strobe display. On the other hand, the drawing effect patterns 02AKA02, 02AKAB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 are patterns for executing a specific drawing effect by one or both of the effect display and the strobe display. When the variable display result is "big hit" among the cases where the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is higher than the case where the variable display result is "missing". The ratio of drawing effect patterns other than the above is increased. Therefore, when the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when the specific drawing effect which is the drawing effect by the effect display or the strobe display is executed, the specific drawing effect is not executed as compared with the case where the specific drawing effect is not executed. , The variable display result becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state increases. Further, in the drawing effect patterns other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the determination ratio is set according to the variable display result so that the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher than that of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01.

When the reach effect content is SP reach B, it is possible to determine only the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and a restriction is provided so that it is not determined other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. When the content of the reach effect is SP reach B, the reach effect of super reach, which is a "strong SP reach" with higher reliability than the case of SP reach A1 to A3, is executed. In such a case, if the specific drawing effect by the effect display or the strobe display is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the reach effect of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, which may reduce the game interest. be. Therefore, in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, there is a limitation as a limit that the specific drawing effect by the effect display or the strobe display is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being hindered by the reach effect of the super reach having high jackpot reliability, and to appropriately improve the game entertainment.

When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it is possible to determine the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKAB01, 02AKAB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 at a different ratio depending on the variable display result. .. When the content of the reach effect is any one of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach effect of super reach, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than the case of SP reach B, is executed. In such a case, when a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is executed, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state increases. In this way, when the reach effect content is any one of SP reach A1 to A3, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is increased by executing the specific drawing effect, so that the jackpot reliability is low. Even in the case of the reach effect of, the player's expectation can be raised by executing the specific drawing effect, and the game entertainment can be appropriately improved.

Even when the reach effect content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine the drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a predetermined ratio. However, when the reach effect content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the reach effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. In this way, in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, the limit that the specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display can be executed at a lower rate than the range where the reach effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. May be limited as.

FIG. 9-9 (A) shows the effect execution period in the variable display of the super reach. When the variable display of super reach is executed, the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display can be divided into a plurality of effect execution periods such as the effect execution period D0 to D4. The effect execution period D0 is a period from the start of the variable display to the start of the execution of the reach effect after the reach is established. The effect execution period D1 is a period from the start of the reach effect execution period in which the reach effect to be super reach is executed to the start of the chance up effect execution period in which the chance up effect can be executed. The effect execution period D2 is a period from the start of the chance-up effect execution period to the start of the result notification effect execution period in which the result notification effect can be executed after the chance-up effect execution period ends. The result notification effect may be any effect that notifies the effect result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in the reach effect that becomes the super reach. The effect execution period D3 is a period from the start to the end of the result notification effect execution period. The effect execution period D4 is a period from the end of the result notification effect execution period to the end of the variable display.

FIG. 9-9 (B) shows an effect control example 02AKC01 in each effect execution period. Of the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, in the effect execution period D2 from the start of the chance-up effect execution period to the start of the result notification effect execution period, the specific drawing effect SPE is performed when the drawing effect pattern is other than 02AKA01. Become feasible. In the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, since the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed even during the effect execution period D2, and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed.

Of the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, in the effect execution period D0 from the start of the variable display to the start of the reach effect of the super reach, regardless of whether the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. , The specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. For example, in the effect execution period D0, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, if it is possible to execute a light emission effect using the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs in response to the BGM and the sound effect output. good. Further, in the effect execution period D0, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right", or "left", "middle", and "right". When the decorative symbols that make up the pseudo-consecutive chances are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are used in response to BGM and sound effect output. It may be possible to carry out a light emission effect using. In addition, during the entire effect execution period D0, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed, and the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are used to emit light in response to the BGM and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display. The production may be feasible.

Among the effect execution periods D1 to D4 in which the reach effect of super reach is executed during the execution of the variable display, in the effect execution period D1 following the effect execution period D0, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. Regardless of whether or not, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. In the effect execution period D2 after the effect execution period D1, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is used, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is not used. be. In the normal drawing effect NOR by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. In the specific drawing effect SPE other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, for example, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed on 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are the specific layers. Even when the specific drawing effect SPE other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed, for example, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

In the effect execution period D3 and the effect execution period D4 after the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR is not executed regardless of whether the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. Becomes feasible. In the effect execution period D3, as in the effect execution period D2, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is used, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is not used. May be. When the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the effect execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is normally drawn in the effect execution period D4 for confirming and notifying the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result. It suffices to return to the execution of the production NOR. Further, the specific drawing effect SPE may be executed in all of the plurality of effect execution periods D1 to D4. Prior to the variable display in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE can be started based on the determination result that the reach effect of the super reach is executed as the determination result at the time of starting winning. You may do so. Even when the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in a period other than the effect execution period D2, for example, in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are specific layers, as in the case of executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2. An image drawn by a specific drawing process can be displayed. For example, in layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, an image drawn by a normal drawing process may be displayed.

When the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even in a period other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, a light emission effect using a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs is performed. It is feasible. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed during the effect execution period D2 or the like, it is controlled so that the light emission effect is not executed. For example, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs may be turned off so that the light emitting effect is not executed. As described above, when the normal drawing effect NOR capable of displaying the image drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, it is possible to execute the light emitting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying the image drawn by the specific drawing process is executed, the light emitting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR capable of displaying the image drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, the light emission effect by the light emission of the light emitting member can be executed, while the image drawn by the specific drawing process is executed. Within the range of the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying the image is executed, there is a limit as a limit that the light emission effect by the light emission of the light emitting member is not executed. When the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is executed, by not executing the light emission effect, an appropriate image that the player can easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display can improve the entertainment of the game.

When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed during the effect execution period D2 or the like, it is not limited to the one provided with the restriction that the light emission effect by the light emission of the light emitting member is not executed, and for example, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. There may be restrictions on the mode of effect of the light emission effect, such as reducing the amount of effect of the light emission effect. When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the emission amount (luminance) of the light emitting member in the light emission effect is reduced as compared with the case where the normal drawing effect NOR is executed, so that the effect amount is limited to be reduced. It may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is limited to be reduced by reducing the number of light emitting members capable of emitting light in the light emission effect as compared with the case where the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. May be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the emission color used in the light emission effect (for example, single color emission) as compared with the case where the normal drawing process NOR is executed. Restrictions may be set as such.

9-10 to 9-13 show execution examples of reach effect and drawing effect. FIG. 9-10 shows an example of effect execution when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined among the cases where the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed. FIG. 9-11 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined. FIG. 9-12 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined. FIG. 9-13 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined.

FIG. 9-10 (A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM01 in the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode and the reach is established. At this time, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right", the common decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers "7" are aligned and stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and the reach is established. , The reach production of normal reach is executed. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM01, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be appropriately executed corresponding to the effect execution period D0. For example, it suffices if it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output from the establishment of reach to the development of super reach.

FIG. 9-10 (B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM02 in the case where the reach effect of the normal reach shifts to the reach effect of the super reach in response to the start of the effect execution period D1. 9-10 (C) and 9-10 (D) show the effect execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when the reach effect of the super reach progresses in the effect execution period D1. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern corresponding to the effect execution period D1, and the specific drawing effect can be executed. Do not execute SPE.

FIG. 9-10 (E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM05 when the chance-up effect during reach is executed in the effect execution period D2. FIG. 9-10 (F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM06 in the case where the reach effect after the chance-up effect is executed in the effect execution period D2. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKAM05 and 02AKAM06, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed corresponding to the effect execution period D2. At this time, since the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is not executed.

FIG. 9-10 (G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM07 when the result notification effect is executed in the effect execution period D3. At this time, as the reach effect of the super reach, a reach effect in which the effect content differs depending on the variable display result is executed, and the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are executed. Then, the fixed decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed by shaking display or the like. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM07, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, corresponding to the effect execution period D3, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. Do not execute.

FIG. 9-10 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM08 in the case where the final notification of the variable display result is executed in the effect execution period D4. At this time, as the reach effect of the super reach ends, the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the complete stop display. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM08, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, corresponding to the effect execution period D4, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. Do not execute.

FIG. 9-11 (A) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 11 when a chance-up effect during reach is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2. The effect display at this time may be the same as the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05. However, the pause display may be started corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. For example, the image drawn on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, may be copied to the copy area provided in the VRAM 91AK147 and stored in a reusable manner. Further, it is controlled not to execute the light emission effect in response to the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE by the strobe display.

FIG. 9-11 (B) shows an effect execution example 02 AKM 12 in the case of executing a strobe display following the effect execution example 02 AKM 11. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM12, an image having a black color as a whole is drawn and displayed as a single color image on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are specific layers. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be sufficient as long as the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed.

FIG. 9-11 (C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM 13 in the case of executing an effect display which is a pause display during the strobe display, following the effect execution example 02 AKM 12. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM13, it is sufficient that the pause display can be executed during the strobe display by repeating the pause display started in the effect execution example 02AKM11. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to layer 01AKL5, which are specific layers, by drawing an image read from the copy area of VRAM91AK147, the same image pause as in the effect execution example 02AKM11 may be paused and displayed repeatedly.

FIG. 9-11 (D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM 14 that repeatedly displays an image similar to the effect execution example 02 AKM 12 following the effect execution example 02 AKM 13. FIG. 9-11 (E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM15 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13, following the effect execution example 02AKM14. FIG. 9-11 (F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM 16 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM12 and 02AKM14, following the effect execution example 02AKM15. FIG. 9-11 (G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM17 in which the same images as those of the effect execution example 02AKM11, 02AKM13, and 02AKM15 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM16. FIG. 9-11 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM18 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution example 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16, following the effect execution example 02AKM17. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly switching and displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, it is possible to perform pause display as well as strobe display. .. After the strobe display of the effect execution example 02 AKM18 is completed, the normal drawing effect NOR is returned to the execution, and the light emission effect is controlled to be executed.

Such a strobe display can be executed without using dedicated image data by using an image with settings different from the image data according to the drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the image is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by strobe display can be executed according to the drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR can be used by the player. Since different impressions can be given, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing.

In FIG. 9-12 (A), when the chance-up effect during reach is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed. The production execution example 02AKM21 is shown. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05 in that the images drawn by the monochrome conversion calculation process, which is the specific drawing process, are displayed in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. are doing.

FIG. 9-12 (B) shows the effect execution example 02AKM22 in the case of executing the strobe display following the effect execution example 02AKM21. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM22, similarly to the effect execution example 02AKM12 and the like, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, draw and display an entirely black image as a single color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be sufficient as long as the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed.

FIG. 9-12 (C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM23 in which a specific drawing effect SPE by a monochrome conversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed during the execution of the chance-up effect during reach, following the effect execution example 02AKM22. Is shown. In the case of the effect execution example 02 AKM23, it suffices if the chance-up effect during reach started in the effect execution example 02 AKM 21 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as a chance-up effect during the strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect, even when the strobe display is executed, the image drawn by using the image data read out according to the elapsed time is displayed as in the case of the effect execution example 02AKM05. The pause display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-12 (D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM 24 that repeatedly displays an image similar to the effect execution example 02 AKM 22 following the effect execution example 02 AKM 23. FIG. 9-12 (E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM 25 in the case where the reach effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 24. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06 in that the images drawn by the monochrome conversion calculation process, which is the specific drawing process, are displayed in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. are doing.

FIG. 9-12 (F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM26 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24, following the effect execution example 02AKM25. FIG. 9-12 (G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM 27 when a reach effect after the effect execution example 02 AKM 25 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 26. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient that the reach effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM25 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as the reach effect during the strobe display, or the pause display may not be executed as the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM28 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution example 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26, following the effect execution example 02AKM27. In this way, a monochrome conversion image drawn by reducing the number of colors in the color information by monochrome conversion calculation processing using image data and a single color image with settings different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying the image, it is possible to execute the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect together with the strobe display.

The effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, is a dedicated image using an image drawn with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data in response to the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It can be executed regardless of the data. As a result, even if the image is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect can be executed according to the effect drawing command. Since the impression given to the player can be different, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, with the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and the display effect is prevented while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. It is possible to enhance the impression of the game and improve the game entertainment.

In FIG. 9-13 (A), when the chance-up effect during reach is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed. The production execution example 02AKM31 to be performed is shown. The effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of the color information by the difference calculation process which is the specific drawing process in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are the specific layers as compared with the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05. Is different in that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13 (B) shows the effect execution example 02AKM32 in the case of executing the strobe display following the effect execution example 02AKM31. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM32, similarly to the effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22, etc., the entire black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image on the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are specific layers. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may be sufficient as long as the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed.

FIG. 9-13 (C) shows an effect execution example in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM32, a specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed during the execution of the chance-up effect during reach. 02AKM33 is shown. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM33, it suffices if the chance-up effect during reach started in the effect execution example 02AKM31 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as a chance-up effect during the strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect, even when the strobe display is executed, the image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time is displayed as in the case of the effect execution example 02AKM05. , The pause display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-13 (D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM 34 that repeatedly displays the same image as the effect execution example 02 AKM 32, following the effect execution example 02 AKM 33. FIG. 9-13 (E) shows the effect execution example 02AKM35 in the case where the reach effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM34. The effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of the color information by the difference calculation process which is the specific drawing process in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 which are the specific layers as compared with the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06. Is different in that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13 (F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM36 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034, following the effect execution example 02AKM35. FIG. 9-13 (G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM 37 when a reach effect after the effect execution example 02 AKM 35 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02 AKM 36. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient that the reach effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM35 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that the pause display may be executed as the reach effect during the strobe display, or the pause display may not be executed as the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13 (H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM38 that repeatedly displays the same images as the effect execution example 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36, following the effect execution example 02AKM37. In this way, the image by color information inversion drawn by converting the color information value by the difference calculation process using the image data and the single color image by the setting different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying the image, it is possible to execute the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect together with the strobe display.

The effect display, which is the color information inversion effect, is dedicated image data using an image drawn by converting the value of the color information included in the image data according to the drawing command for the effect transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It is feasible regardless. As a result, even if the image is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information inversion effect can be executed according to the effect drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. Can give different impressions to the player, so that it is possible to improve the game interest by executing various display effects while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, with the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and the display is displayed while preventing the amount of image data from increasing. It is possible to enhance the impression of the production and improve the entertainment of the game.

By executing the specific drawing effect SPE by the effect display or the strobe display, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort in the display effect that is not normally found in the drawing effect NOR. When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach effect of super reach, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than the case of SP reach B, is executed, while the reach effect is executed. It is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE that gives a sense of discomfort in the display effect that is not found in the normal drawing effect NOR. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state becomes high, so that the player's expectation can be raised and the game entertainment can be appropriately improved.

The invention relating to the feature portions 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features related to the feature portions 01AK and 02AK, and has the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with a part.

The strobe display has been described as being executed by alternately and repeatedly switching and displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image having a setting different from the image data. In such a strobe display, a part or all of a single color image may be replaced with a specific image prepared in advance and displayed. For example, when an effect image to be a character image is inserted and displayed as a specific image, the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" and is controlled to a big hit game state, as compared with the case where a single color image is repeatedly displayed. The drawing effect content and the determination ratio of the drawing effect pattern may be set so that the ratio becomes high.

It has been described that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emission effect using the light emitting member is not executed. The light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a light emitting display effect by causing the display unit of the light guide plate to emit light. For example, a light guide plate as a transparent light guide member having light transmission is provided on the front side (front side) of a part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5. Further, a light emitting member such as a light guide plate LED is provided in the vicinity of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitting member is introduced through the end face of the light guide plate and reflected by a reflection portion formed in advance inside the light guide plate. Therefore, a light emitting display effect for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like may be executed. Then, in the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern or the like, it is sufficient that the light emission display effect can be executed based on the determination result of the light emission display effect pattern or the like. On the other hand, in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern or the like, it is sufficient to control so that the light emission display effect is not executed.

Further, the light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a button light emitting effect by causing the button light emitting unit mounted inside the push button 31B to emit light. In this case, it suffices if the button light emission effect can be executed based on the determination result of the button light emission effect pattern or the like during the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern or the like. On the other hand, in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern or the like, it is sufficient to control so that the button light emission effect is not executed.

When a plurality of display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the layer 01AKL2 that draws the effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display so as to be displayable may be included in a specific layer instead of the special layer. In the setting where the layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display is drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, such as color information. May be changed. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect is executed, it is sufficient that the effect image corresponding to the hold display or the active display can be changed to a monochrome image having a small number of colors and displayed. While enabling monochrome display of such hold display and active display, when it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display related to variable display such as hold display and active display, the specific drawing effect SPE When the change effect is executed during the execution of, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted. The display color of the specific display may be different depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot gaming state. When there is a success pattern that changes the display color of the specific display and a failure pattern that does not change the display color of the specific display, the change effect of the success pattern is executed during the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE. When the display color of the specific display changes to the specific color, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted. Execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is started at the timing when the hold display is displayed, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the hold display are performed, the change effect of the success pattern is executed and the display color of the active display is changed. When the color changes to a specific color, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted.

As the display layer included in the special layer, a direction display layer for drawing an effect image showing the launch direction of the game ball so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the direction display layer, as an operation promotion effect that is a left-handed effect or a right-handed effect, when a launch promotion effect is executed, an effect image that prompts the game ball to be fired toward the left game area or the right game area is displayed. It suffices if it can be drawn and displayed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game can be played by firing a game ball as a game medium, and a first path and a second path are provided as a movement path through which the game ball can flow down. The first route may be a right-handed route that is a right-handed game area in the game area, and the second route may be a left-handed area that is a left-handed game area in the game area. Then, when it is the first state in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down to the first path, the first promotion image prompting the launch of the game medium toward the first path can be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer. It should be. Further, when it is the second state in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down to the second path, a second promotion image for prompting the launch of the game medium toward the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is displayed. It may be possible to draw and display it on the direction display layer. As described above, by including the direction display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the direction is displayed. In the display layer, it suffices if the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. Therefore, the effect image urging the game ball to be launched toward the left game area or the right game area may be drawn and displayed on a special layer by a normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display the image that encourages the launch of the game medium by the normal drawing process instead of the specific drawing process, various display effects are executed while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image that encourages the launch of the game medium. Then, the game entertainment can be improved.

As the operation promotion effect, an effect image indicating that the effect output amount can be changed, such as volume, screen brightness, and a part or all of the light emission amount, may be drawn and displayed. As the display layer included in the special layer, an operation display layer for drawing an effect image or the like in such an operation promotion effect so as to be displayable may be included.

As the display layer included in the special layer, a warning display layer for drawing a warning image or the like for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be included. For example, in the warning display layer, detection by various sensors such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door opening sensor, a big prize opening door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball burnout sensor connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the state, the state of the payout board, the detection state of the game ball by the start port switch, the count switch, etc., a warning image corresponding to the generated error is drawn and displayed. If possible. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer having the highest display priority among the plurality of display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the warning is displayed. In the display layer, it suffices if the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. Therefore, the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality may be drawn and displayed on a special layer by a normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality by normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing, various display effects can be achieved while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality. It can be executed to improve the game entertainment. In the case of notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, even during the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE in which the light emission effect is not executed, the light emission notification at the time of abnormality may be executed by causing the light emitting member to emit light. In this way, the notification regarding the occurrence of the abnormality may be executed with a higher priority than other effects.

As the display layer included in the special layer, a suggestion display layer for drawing the effect image in the setting suggestion effect so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the suggestion display layer, it is sufficient that the setting suggestion images determined at different ratios can be drawn and displayed according to the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player, and as a suggestion regarding the setting of the set value, whether or not to execute the pachinko machine and the effect mode are set according to the set value. It suffices if it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects with different determination ratios. For example, one of a plurality of setting suggestion images may be selected at a different ratio depending on the setting value, and the selected setting suggestion image may be drawn and displayed on the suggestion display layer. As described above, by including the suggestion display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the suggestion is made. In the display layer, it suffices if the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. An image suggesting a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be drawn and displayed on a special layer by a normal drawing process instead of a specific drawing process, so that an image suggesting a setting value having a different advantage for the player can be displayed. While appropriately ensuring visibility, various display effects can be performed to improve the enjoyment of pachinko. Alternatively, the suggestion display layer may be included in a specific layer instead of a special layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the specific layer, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed in the special layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the suggestion is made. The display layer may display an image drawn by a specific drawing process. By being able to draw and display an image suggesting a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on a specific layer by a specific drawing process, the display of an image suggesting a setting value having a different advantage for the player is diversified. , It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

At least some of the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example applied to this slot machine, when it is possible to control the assist time (also referred to as AT) which is the notification period in which the navigation notification for notifying the stop order which is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result can be executed. , As the navigation notification, an effect image for notifying the stop order in an identifiable manner may be displayed on the screen of the image display device. In this case, as the display layer included in the special layer, a notification display layer that draws an effect image used for navigation notification so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the notification display layer, when the order of stopping the variable display by each reel on the left, middle, and right is notified, a stop order image showing the order of the stop operation by the stop switch can be drawn and displayed on the notification display layer. good. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the notification is displayed. In the display layer, it suffices if the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. The visibility of the image that informs the operation mode can be displayed by drawing the image that informs the operation mode when the variable display in the slot machine is stopped on a special layer by the normal drawing process instead of the specific drawing process. It is possible to improve the game entertainment by executing various display effects while appropriately ensuring.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature unit 01AK)
The present embodiment includes the following inventions. That is, in a gaming machine capable of performing a game such as a pachinko gaming machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-171129, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an effect image is produced according to an instruction of a display list. A technique for slanting and deforming a slingshot to display a slingshot image, or a pachinko machine for drawing a processed image in which a plurality of deformed images generated by using an inverted image are arranged, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-29947. Was also proposed. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, the visibility of an important image may be deteriorated because the entire image is changed. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming while appropriately ensuring the visibility of images.
The gaming machine related to the feature unit 01AK is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, and uses a storage means for storing image data such as an effect data memory 91AK123 and a VRAM91AK147, and image data. An image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing is provided, and the image processing means draws corresponding to image data, for example, normal drawing processing such as drawing processing according to a drawing command for normal display, and normal drawing processing. At least the color information included in the image data can be changed and drawn, for example, specific drawing processing such as drawing processing according to an effect drawing command can be executed. For example, a plurality of layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 having different priorities. An image in each of the layers can be displayed, and the plurality of layers include, for example, a specific layer such as layers AKL03 to AKL05 and a special layer having a higher priority than the specific layer, for example, layers AKL01 and AKL02. In steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, the specific layer can be drawn by the specific drawing process and the effect image can be displayed. For example, in step 01AKS04, the special layer is drawn by the normal drawing process and is related to the progress of the game. A predetermined image can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the amount of data, and while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

The specific drawing process may draw with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data (for example, monochrome conversion), for example, monochrome conversion. As a result, while preventing an increase in the amount of data, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

In the specific drawing process, the value of the color information included in the image data may be converted and drawn (for example, color information inversion), for example, such as color information inversion. As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while preventing an increase in the data capacity.

For example, as in the effect control example 02AKC01, the first period (for example, the effect execution period D1) in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D1 is not executed, and the second period in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D2 is executed are executed. Of a plurality of periods including a period (for example, the effect execution period D2), the light emitting means can be made to emit light in the first period, and the light emitting means may not be made to emit light in the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, for example, a first period (for example, the effect execution period D1) in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D1 is not executed, and a second period (for example, the effect execution period D2) in which the specific drawing process such as the effect execution period D2 is executed. In the first period, the light emitting means can be made to emit light in the normal mode, and in the second period, the light emission of the light emitting means may be restricted more than in the normal mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, the setting value change process S6A that can be set to any setting value (for example, a value from 1 to 6) among a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, a value from 1 to 6. A setting means such as a CPU 103 to be executed (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a setting value change process S6A) is provided, and suggestions regarding the setting of the setting means are given by displaying a specific mode, for example, setting such as an effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. Suggestion effects (for example, effects by effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process may not be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, the setting value change process S6A that can be set to any setting value (for example, a value from 1 to 6) among a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, a value from 1 to 6. A setting means such as a CPU 103 to be executed (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a setting value change process S6A) is provided, and suggestions regarding the setting of the setting means are given by displaying a specific mode, for example, setting suggestions such as an effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. The effect (for example, the effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process may be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image, it is possible to execute the production by various displays, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

For example, it may be possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02) for suspending and displaying an image, such as a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while preventing an increase in the data capacity.

For example, as in the production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, the image drawn using the image data and the monochromatic image may be alternately displayed on the specific layer (see, for example, the production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28). As a result, while preventing the increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute the production by various displays, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

For example, variable display of decorative symbols in "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, Variable display of the identification information image, such as variable display of decorative symbols in 5R), and reduction in a mode smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display area 01AKC1. Variable display of the identification information image (for example, variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1) can be executed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-5, the identification information image is drawn and displayed by a specific drawing process. It is possible, and the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed by a normal drawing process. As a result, while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image, it is possible to execute the production by various displays, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature unit 02AK)
The gaming machine related to the feature unit 02AK is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, and uses a storage means for storing image data such as an effect data memory 91AK123 and a VRAM91AK147, and image data. It is provided with an image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing, and suggests that it is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player such as a jackpot gaming state, for example, a specific effect such as a reach effect of super reach. Is possible during variable display, and the effect pattern of the specific effect is different in the ratio controlled to the advantageous state, for example, a first pattern such as the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and a second pattern such as the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. Of the effect period in which the specific effect is executed, at least in the first period such as the effect execution period D1, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, for example, during the normal drawing effect. It is possible to display an image drawn by a normal drawing process such as a drawing process according to the drawing command of, and among the effect periods in which a specific effect is executed, a second period after the first period, for example, an effect execution period D2. In the second period, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed in the case of the first pattern, and in the case of the second pattern, the specific drawing process such as the drawing process according to the drawing command at the time of the specific drawing effect is performed. It is possible to display the image drawn by. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the amount of data and to appropriately raise the expectation of the player while making it possible to perform an effect with various displays, and to improve the interest of the game.

The specific drawing process may draw with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data, for example, such as monochrome conversion. As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while preventing an increase in the data capacity.

In the specific drawing process, the value of the color information included in the image data may be converted and drawn, for example, color information inversion. As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game by making it possible to perform various display effects while preventing an increase in the data capacity.

For example, as in the effect control example 02AKC01, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect by the light emitting means in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, and to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect. Correspondingly, the light emission effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, the light emitting effect by the light emitting means can be executed in the normal mode in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect can be displayed. The light emission effect may be limited more than in the normal mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

It is provided with a setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A, which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, a value from 1 to 6. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect such as an effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which the suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed by displaying a specific mode, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by the specific drawing process. The image may not be displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A, which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, a value from 1 to 6, is provided and set. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect such as an effect by the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which the suggestion regarding the setting of the means is given by displaying a specific mode, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by the specific drawing process. The image may be displayable. As a result, while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image, it is possible to execute the production by various displays, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect of pausing and displaying an image in the case of the second pattern, for example, a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. As a result, while preventing an increase in the amount of data, it is possible to execute an effect with various displays, and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

In the second period, an image drawn using the image data and a monochromatic image may be alternately displayed in the case of the second pattern, for example, as in the production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28. As a result, while preventing the increase in the data capacity, it is possible to execute the production by various displays, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

For example, variable display of the identification information image such as variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and small symbols in the small symbol display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to perform variable display of the reduced identification information image in a mode smaller than that of the identification information image, such as variable display of the above. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is subjected to a specific drawing process. It can be drawn and displayed, and the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed by a normal drawing process. As a result, while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image, it is possible to execute the production by various displays, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The configurations relating to the feature portions 01AK and 02AK may be appropriately combined with some or all of the configurations relating to the feature portions 91AK and 92AK and the configurations relating to the feature portion 60AK. For example, in the configuration in which the operation effect to be executed after the lapse of a predetermined period can be executed as the setting suggestion effect which is the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, the first component element in the display period of the character image added to the moving image of 1. And the second component can be changed, or a character image using data related to a common character image is added to the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image. In the configuration that can be displayed, the specific layer can be drawn by the specific drawing process and the effect image can be displayed, and the special layer having a higher priority than the specific layer is drawn by the normal drawing process. A predetermined image related to the progress of the game may be displayed, or in the second period after the first period, the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed in the case of the first pattern. It may be possible to display an image drawn by a specific drawing process when the second pattern has a different ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state from the first pattern.

(Explanation of feature 75SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 of the feature portion 75SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-26. FIG. 10-1 is a front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as a feature portion 75SG. FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine as the feature portion 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a front view showing a gaming board of a pachinko gaming machine as a feature portion 75SG. 10-4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction is the rear. Further, the description will be given with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. Further, the same parts as those in the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 has a gaming board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) constituting the gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame 3 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. It is also called the underframe 3). A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area Y. Further, the game machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a rotatably around the left side, and the glass door frame 50 can open and close the game area Y. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, and methacrylic resin in a substantially square shape in front view, and an obstacle nail (not shown) on the front surface of the game board. , A board surface plate 200 provided with a guide rail 211, an outer rail decoration 212, and the like, and a spacer member 201 integrally attached to the back surface side of the board surface plate 200. The game board 2 is formed of a non-translucent member such as a veneer board in a substantially square shape in front view, and the game board 2 is provided with obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 211, etc. on the front game board surface. May be configured.

An opening 2c is formed in the board surface plate 200 and the spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5 provided at a position away from the game board 2 on the back side is passed through the opening 2c on the player side. It can be visually recognized from the (front side). Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, the area overlapping the board surface plate 200 is visible through the board surface plate 200.

Further, a center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board surface plate 200, and the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, the guide rail 211, and the outer rail decoration 212 is the flow area of the game ball in the game area Y. Has been done. Further, a light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by the center decorative frame 51.

The first effect unit 300 is provided at the lower position on the back side of the board plate 200, that is, at the lower position of the image display device 5. The second effect unit 400 is provided at a position corresponding to the right side of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. A third effect unit 600 is provided at a position corresponding to the upper part of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5. A fourth effect unit 800 is provided at a position on the upper left side of the back surface of the board plate 200, that is, at a position on the upper left side of the image display device 5. Further, at the lower right position of the board plate 200, a variable winning ball unit 700 capable of winning a game ball flowing down the game area Y is provided.

Since the first effect unit 300 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided on the back side of the board surface plate 200, they can be seen through the board surface plate 200 from the player side (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001). ing. On the other hand, the second effect unit 400 and the third effect unit 600 are located at least in front of the game board surface whose front surface is the front surface of the board surface plate 200, and are arranged in the opening 2c, so that the light guide plate device is provided. It is visible from the player side through the light guide plate 501 of 500.

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 10-6 are enlarged front views showing the main parts of the light guide plate device, (B) is a sectional view taken along the line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main parts of (B). Is. Here, in order to help understanding, the light emitting region 506 is shown by dots (halftone dots), and the non-light emitting region 507 without dots (halftone dots) is shown in white.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 includes a light guide plate 501 provided so as to close the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 except for the right side and the lower area. A collection of LED substrates 503 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 for incident light on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501 and light from the light guide plate LED 502 are collected toward the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501. It mainly has an optical lens 504. The light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) fixed to the back surface of the game board 2 or the center decorative frame 51.

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member having a predetermined front-rear width dimension (plate thickness = about 5 mm) and is made of a transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate, and is a plate member as shown in FIG. 10-4. It is arranged in front of the third effect unit 600 and close to the glass window 50a.

Further, the light guide plate 501 has a light emitting region 506 as a first region for forming a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits light from the front surface. , A light emitting region (see the net spot region in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6 (A)) emitted by light incident inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and inside from the right end surface 501a. The non-light emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, does not emit light due to the light incident inside the light guide plate 501. It has a non-light emitting region (see the white region in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6 (A)).

The light emitting region 506 is formed so that a graphic whose peripheral edge is radial appears at a substantially central position of the light guide plate 501, and when light is incident inside the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 reflects the light and moves forward. By emitting light, a predetermined image is emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 501.

As shown in FIGS. 10-6 (B) and 10-6 (C), the light emitting region 506 is in a fine uneven state so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident inside from the right end surface 501a and emit it from the front surface. It is formed on the back side (rough surface). Specifically, the light emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch in a cross-sectional view when the traveling direction of light is viewed from the side. In FIG. 10-6 (C), the uneven state (rough surface) is enlarged to help understanding, but the actual light emitting region 506 is a fine particle having a size that is difficult to see with the naked eye. It is in an uneven state.

When light is incident inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by a dot pattern composed of a plurality of recesses 510 formed in the light emitting region 506 (FIG. See the halftone dot area in 10-5). That is, the light emitting region 506 as the first region forming a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface is from the plurality of recesses 510. This is a region in which a dot pattern is formed, and is not a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits light from the front surface. The light emitting region 507 is a region in which a dot pattern composed of a plurality of recesses 510 is not formed. Further, in the feature unit 75SG, a predetermined image (figure) is exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but in addition to these, decorations such as a pattern, a character, a symbol, a pattern, or a pattern are also included. Other display information including may be displayable.

In the light guide plate 501, when no light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the entire light guide plate 501 including the light emitting region 506 is colorless and transparent, and the display image of the rear image display device 5 and the first The 2 effect unit 400 and the 3rd effect unit 600 can be visually recognized (perspective) from the front of the light guide plate 501. Further, in the state where the light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the portion of the light emitting region 506 emits light, but the portion other than the light emitting region 506 is maintained in a colorless and transparent state.

In the feature portion 75SG, the light emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state having a substantially semicircular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emitting region 506 is formed by a light guide plate by a stamper or injection. It may be configured by a molding method in which an uneven portion is provided on the back surface (rear surface) of 501. In addition, the reflective part is configured by a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, a sticking dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflector are attached with a dot-shaped adhesive, and a groove processing method. May be.

In the feature portion 75SG, the shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 is substantially a semicircular shape in a cross-sectional view, but the present invention is not limited to this. The cross-sectional shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 can be variously deformed as long as it constitutes a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light toward the front (front surface), such as a substantially triangular shape.

The condenser lens 504 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending in the vertical direction by a translucent member such as acrylic or polycarbonate. On the surface of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side, a plurality of semicircular convex portions 504A bulging toward the light guide plate 501 in front view are continuously formed in the vertical direction. The condenser lens 504 is composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided. Each convex portion 504A is formed one by one corresponding to each of the light guide plate LED 502.

The convex portion 504A is not limited to one-to-one correspondence with the light guide plate LED 502, and for example, one convex portion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502. Further, the condenser lens 504 is not limited to being composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided, and a plurality of condenser lenses separately formed corresponding to the light guide plate LED 502 may be formed. You may use it.

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (C), the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. Further, since the front-rear width of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504 is substantially the same as the front-rear width of the light receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is diffused in the front-rear direction. It is incident on the light guide plate 501 without any light leakage.

The front surface of the condenser lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines backward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side, and the rear surface of the condenser lens 504 is a light guide plate from the light guide plate LED 502 side. It is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines toward the front side toward the 501 side. That is, the condenser lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape in which the plate thickness gradually decreases from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

Further, a slight gap is provided between the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501. For example, the gap between the gaps is such that the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 do not come into contact with each other even when vibration occurs during transportation or use of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. As a result, it is possible to prevent the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being scratched by the vibration generated during the transportation and use of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 will be described. The emitted light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 is incident on the condenser lens 504. Here, since the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is formed in a curved shape so as to form a lens surface, the incident surface is incident on the condenser lens 504 even when the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high. The light is diffused radially in the condensing lens 504 in the left-right direction. Then, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 is refracted toward the right and emitted when passing through the inner curved lens surface.

As a result, even when the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 can be diffused radially to some extent by the condenser lens 504, and the light emitting region in the light guide plate 501 can be diffused to some extent. Can be expanded. Further, since the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (because the radial spread is suppressed), only the portion corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502 can be emitted. Further, the light incident on the light guide plate LED 502 from the light guide plate LED 502 is collected toward a substantially central position in the front-rear direction while being repeatedly totally reflected in the front-rear direction, and finally the light guide plate of the light guide plate 504 of the light guide plate 504. It is emitted from the end face on the 501 side (the portion having the smallest front-rear width).

With such a configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be collected and guided to the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-rear direction. In particular, even when the front-rear width of the light emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-rear width on the light guide plate LED 502 side of the condenser lens 504, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 is not diffused in the front-rear direction. Since it can be guided to 501, it is possible to prevent the light from the light guide plate LED 502 from being diffused to the surroundings.

When the light from the condenser lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting region 506, the light is reflected toward the front side (player's side) in the light emitting region 506. As a result, from the viewpoint of the player, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light by the reflected light, so that the region represented by the halftone dots in FIG. 10-5 emits surface light on the front surface of the light guide plate 501. The figure will be displayed with.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, the image display device 5 is arranged in the back and the light guide plate device 500 is arranged in the front when viewed from the player (in the front-rear direction). From the player's point of view, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, the image display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal panel. The image display device 5 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device may be used.

(1st production unit 300)
Next, the first effect unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-7 to 10-12. 10-7 are a front view showing the first effect unit (A) and a rear view showing the first effect unit (B). FIG. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the first effect unit is viewed diagonally from the front. 10-9 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 10-7 (A), FIG. 10-9 is a sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 10-7 (A), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of EE of (A). 10-10 is a front view showing a base member, (B) is a front view showing an LED substrate, and (C) is a front view showing a cover member. 10-11 is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and FIG. 10-11 is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing a main part of FIG. 10-11 (B).

As shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, the first effect unit 300 is arranged so as to cover the base member 301 and the front surface side of the base member 301, and is attached to the base member 301 by a plurality of screws N1. The cover member 302 is mainly composed of a cover member 302 and an LED substrate 303 attached to the front surface of the base member 301 by a plurality of screws N2. It is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the board plate 200.

The base member 301 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material into a horizontally long shape when viewed from the front, and its surface (front-rear surface and peripheral surface) is black. The front surface of the base member 301 includes a flat portion 311 made of a flat surface, a horizontally long rectangular concave portion 312 formed in the lower part of the flat portion 311 and a rear wall portion 313A to be located slightly behind the flat portion 311. It has 313D and.

A plurality of trapezoidal convex portions 314A to 314E forming a part of the decorative pattern 331, which will be described later, are formed in the upper portion of the flat portion 311 in the longitudinal direction, and a rear wall is formed between the convex portions 314A to 314E. The portions 313A to 313D can be visually recognized. The rear wall portions 313A to 313D are formed so as to incline upward toward the rear side (see FIG. 10-9 (B)). Further, a predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surface of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the recess 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, has a depth capable of accommodating the LED substrate 303, and is formed so as to be surrounded by the flat portion 311 in the front view. ing. Then, in the state where the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat portion 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first effect LED 304, which will be described later, is located in front of the flat portion 311. There is. Further, the recess 312 is formed with a plurality of vertically elongated heat radiation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED substrate 303 to the back surface side.

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-9, a plurality of first effect LED 304s capable of irradiating light toward the front and a plurality of other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 303. A plurality of printed wirings 320 are formed (see the enlarged view of FIG. 10-10 (B)). On the other hand, on the back surface of the LED board 303, a board-side connector CN and electronic components (not shown) for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 are mounted. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 303 (insulating portion on the front surface and the back surface excluding the printed wiring 320) is black.

The cover member 302 is formed of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material in a horizontally long shape in front view, and has a first translucent portion 321 corresponding to a part of a flat portion 311 and a recess 312 of the base member 301. It mainly has second translucent portions 322A and 322B corresponding to the first effect LED 304. Further, a plurality of trapezoidal convex portions 324A to 324E are formed at positions corresponding to the convex portions 314A to 314E of the base member 301 in the longitudinal direction.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the front surface of the second translucent portions 322A and 322B protrudes forward from the front surface of the first translucent portion 321 and the concave portion 322D is formed on the back surface. The LED 304 for the first effect can be accommodated. Further, a light diffusing portion 322C composed of fine uneven portions is formed on the back surface of the second translucent portions 322A and 322B, so that the light from the rear first effect LED 304 can be diffused and emitted forward. ing. The uneven portion may be formed by, for example, sandblasting or diamond cutting, and the forming method, shape, and the like can be variously changed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (C), the first translucent portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decorative patterns 331 having a hexagonal front view. Specifically, one decorative pattern 331 forms a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view with a decorative portion 331A consisting of a plurality of horizontal lines extending in the left-right direction and decorative portions 331B and 331C consisting of inclined lines extending diagonally to the left and diagonally to the right. A plurality of decorative patterns 331 are continuously provided by having a decorative portion 331D and a decorative portion 331E having a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and by sharing the decorative portions 331A to 331C with the adjacent decorative patterns 331. ..

Further, in each of these decorative portions 331A to 331E, for example, the back surface (or front surface) of the cover member 302 may be sandblasted to form fine uneven portions, or a translucent seal or the like may be attached. Therefore, each of the decorative portions 331A to 331E looks milky white or translucent when visually recognized from the player side.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), the LED substrate 303 as an electronic component having the first effect LED 304 is arranged on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side thereof is covered with the cover member 302. ing. However, since the cover member 302 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, it is possible for the player to see through the cover member 302 and visually recognize the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303. be.

Here, by arranging the same black base member 301 around (periphery) the black LED substrate 303, the LED substrate 303 is assimilated with the surrounding base member 301, and the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 are assimilated. The boundary part BD with is difficult to understand. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED substrate 303 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 301, so that the LED substrate 303, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front surface side of the base member 301 with the LED substrate 303 arranged in the recess 312 of the base member 301, the base member 301 and the LED substrate are attached. The cover member 302 is positioned high so as to cover the front surface of the 303, and while it is easy to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 through the first translucent portion 321 from the player side. It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first effect LED 304 through the second translucent portions 322A and 322B. Further, by arranging the milky white or translucent decorative portions 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303, the milky white or translucent on the front side of the black background. The decorative pattern 331 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, in a state where the cover member 302 is arranged on the front surface side of the base member 301, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 (for example, the decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) Etc.) are formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 when visually recognized from the player side. Specifically, the decorative portions 331B and 331C composed of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 303 facing the left-right direction and the cover member 302, and one decorative pattern 331 is two members (LEDs). Since it is provided so as to straddle the substrate 303 and the cover member 302), it looks as if one decorative pattern 331 is provided on one member, so that the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 on the back side thereof It becomes difficult to recognize that is a separate member.

Further, since a part of the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 is difficult to see from the player side due to the decorative portions 331B and 331C overlapping on the front side, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous. Since the decorative portions 331B and 331C are linear, even if they are arranged so as to overlap the front surface side of the boundary portion BD, the area overlapping with the boundary portion BD is small, but the decorative pattern 331 covers the LED substrate 303. Since it is formed over almost the entire front surface of the member 302, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members.

Further, since the decorative portion 331A of each decorative pattern 331 is arranged substantially parallel to the boundary portion BD, it is difficult to distinguish the decorative portion 331A because the aspect is similar to the boundary portion BD, and the decorative portion 331A is arranged on the front side of the boundary portion BD. In addition, in the case of milky white, which has a higher brightness than black, it is conspicuous, so that the LED substrate 303 is less conspicuous. By arranging the decorative portion 331A so as to overlap along the boundary portion BD, a part of the boundary portion BD may be difficult to see from the player side by the decorative portion 331A.

Further, these decorative portions 331A to 331C are formed in a linear shape like the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED substrate 303, and are arranged substantially parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, so that the printed wiring is printed. Since the wiring pattern of the 320 is similar (or common) to the wiring pattern, it is difficult to distinguish the LED substrate 303, so that the LED substrate 303 is not conspicuous.

Further, although the decorative portions 331D and 331E are different in mode from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD, they are larger than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD and have a larger area, so that they are more conspicuous than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD. Further, since a part of the printed wiring 320 is overlapped on the front side of the printed wiring 320, the printed wiring 320 becomes difficult to see, and the LED board 303 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, on the front surface of each of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D of the base member 301, a decorative pattern 341 composed of linear convex portions having a hexagonal shape flattened vertically is provided so as to be visible from the player side. The decorative pattern 341 is similar (or common) to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, so that the mode is similar to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 even in the region of the base member 301 not covered by the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 can be formed, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, the base member 301 has rear wall portions 313A to 313D as a predetermined area that can be visually recognized from the player side without seeing through the cover member 302, and the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are provided on the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 as a predetermined decorative pattern having the same or similar aspect as the decorative pattern 331 is provided, it becomes difficult to understand that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members, and thus the LED substrate. 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, since the LED substrate 303 is arranged in the recess 312 formed in the lower part of the base member 301, the LED substrate 303 is located below the upper region of the recess 312 in the base member 301, that is, at a position away from the image display device 5. Since it is provided, it is located at a position away from the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to, so that it is less noticeable.

As described above, among the plurality of decorative patterns 331, the predetermined decorative pattern 331 (for example, the decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIGS. 10-12) is attached to the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 when visually recognized from the player side. By being provided so as to straddle the LED substrate 303, which is an electronic component, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 303, which should not be shown to the player from the viewpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side that can be seen from the player side, so that the degree of freedom in design is high. Can be enhanced.

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 10-13. 10-13 are a front view showing a variable winning ball unit in FIG. 10-13, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 10B.

As shown in FIG. 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 attached to the board plate 200 from the front side and a cover member 702 provided on the front side of the base member 701. The device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are integrally provided as a unit.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the upper right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided in the lower left. Between, the game ball path 705A in which the game ball (game ball P) can enter the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7, and the game ball (game ball) in the second starting winning opening of the variable winning ball device 6B. A game ball path 705B through which P) can enter is provided. Further, below the special variable winning ball device 7, an LED substrate 703 provided with a plurality of effect LEDs 704 capable of irradiating light toward the front is provided.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a translucent synthetic resin material. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the game ball passing through the game ball paths 705A and 705B through the cover plate 702A from the player side.

(1st production unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-14 to 10-16. 10-14 are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 10-15 is a diagram for comparing the first effect unit and the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 10-16 is a diagram for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side at the lower position of the image display device 5, and when visually recognized from the player side, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side. 1 The right end portion of the effect unit 300 is provided so as to overlap or be close to the left end portion of the variable winning ball unit 700. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-13 (B), the front portion of the variable winning ball unit 700 is arranged on the front side of the board surface plate 200, while the first effect unit 300 is the board surface plate 200. It is located on the back side of.

As shown in FIGS. 10-14 (A) and 10-14 (B), the front-rear dimension L1A, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first translucent portion 321 of the first effect unit 300, is the second translucent portion 322A, 322B. It is longer than the front-rear dimension L1B, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in (L1A> L1B).

In the first translucent portion 321 of the cover member 302, among the light entering from the front in the direction orthogonal to the front surface of the first translucent portion 321 (T direction), the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is XA. %. Further, in the second translucent portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302, the light that has entered from the front in the direction (T direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the second transmissive portions 322A and 322B is transmitted in the T direction. The light transmittance is XB%. That is, not all (100%) of the light that has entered the first translucent portion 321 and the second translucent portions 322A and 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and some of the light is reflected on the front surface. , It is emitted in a direction different from the T direction (so as to spread around) at the rear. In particular, the second translucent portions 322A and 322B have a light diffusing portion 322C formed of uneven portions on the back surface, so that light is more easily transmitted in a direction different from the T direction than the first transmissive portion 321. , The transmittance of light in the T direction is lower than the transmittance of the first translucent portion 321 (translucency is low. XA%> XB%).

As shown in FIGS. 10-14 (C) and 10-14 (D), in the cover plate 702A, among the light entering from the front in the direction orthogonal to the front surface (T direction), the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is Y. %. Here, the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the first translucent portion 321 and the second translucent portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302 (L2 <L1A, L2 <L1B), the light incident from the front is guided in the T direction inside and is difficult to be diffused to the surroundings until it is emitted from the back, and there is no light diffusing part like the second transmissive parts 322A and 322B. Since it is a flat plate, the light transmittance of the cover plate 702A in the T direction is higher than the light transmittance of the cover member 302 in the T direction (Y%> XA%, Y%> XB%).

In other words, since the translucency of the cover member 302 is lower than the translucency of the cover plate 702A, a predetermined portion (for example, a game) on the back surface side of the cover plate 702A is passed through the cover plate 702A from the player side. Rather than visually recognizing the ball P), the case where the player sees through the cover member 302 and visually recognizes a predetermined portion (for example, the first effect LED 304 or the LED substrate 303) on the back surface side of the cover member 302. However, since the visibility is low, the LED substrate 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

As shown in FIGS. 10-15, in the first effect unit 300, the LED substrate 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301 arranged around the LED substrate 303 have the same color (black). , The LED substrate 303 is less noticeable. Further, the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302 of the first effect unit 300 are longer than the front-rear dimensions L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B> L2), and the first effect unit. The light transmittance (XA%, XA%) of the cover member 302 of the 300 in the T direction is lower than the light transmittance (Y%) of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 in the T direction. (Y%> XA%, Y%> XB%), the LED substrate 303 is less noticeable.

Therefore, when the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 provided at a position (right side) different from the first effect unit 300 are visually recognized from the player side, the cover member 702 is seen through. Since the visibility when the LED substrate 303 is visually recognized through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility when the game ball P is visually recognized, the variable winning ball unit 700 in the vicinity of the first effect unit 300 is located. The LED substrate 303 arranged on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a translucent member, becomes more difficult to see. Further, the cover member 302 is arranged on the back side of the cover plate 702A, and the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 are dark black, so that the LED substrate 303 becomes less conspicuous.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the LED substrate 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member arranged around the LED substrate 303, are of the same color (black) is exemplified, but the present invention illustrates the present invention. The color is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member may not be the same color, and may be, for example, similar colors or similar colors.

Color has three attributes: hue (hue), lightness (brightness), and saturation (vividness). 2. A combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) but are adjacent to each other on the hue. 3. A combination of different tones but the same hue. Includes color combinations, which differ only in lightness or saturation.

Here, an example of the above "1. Combination of colors having the same tone (hue group having the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) but adjacent colors on the hue (adjacent colors)" is shown in FIGS. 10-16. To explain based on this, when cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y), which are the three primary colors of the colorants, are arranged at an angle interval of 120 degrees in a predetermined number of hue circles (24 colors in this case). Each of the three colors is a non-similar color to each other. Colors having a hue difference in the range of 30 to 60 degrees in the angle of the color wheel are "similar colors" and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors adjacent to each other on the color wheel.

For example, when cyan (C) is used as the reference color, the color belonging to the range of 30 degrees on the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees on the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) becomes a similar color to cyan (C). When magenta (M) is used as the reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees on the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees on the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) become similar colors to magenta (M), and yellow (M). When Y) is used as the reference color, the color belonging to the range of 30 degrees on the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees on the magenta (M) side (60 degrees in total) is a similar color of yellow (Y). Therefore, even when the number of colors in the color wheel is less than 24 colors or 24 colors or more, a combination of colors having a hue difference in the range of 30 to 60 degrees in the angle of the color wheel may be referred to as "similar colors".

Similar colors include warm colors such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that make you feel warm, cool colors such as blue and purple, which are chromatic colors that make you feel cold, and combinations of colors such as green and purple. It is preferable to include a combination of colors contained in a neutral color which is a chromatic color located between warm colors and cool colors.

(2nd production unit 400)
Next, the second effect unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-17 to 10-19. 10-17 is a front view showing the second effect unit in FIG. 10-17, and FIG. 10B is a front view showing the second effect unit in a state where the cover member is removed. 10-18 is a sectional view taken along the line GG of FIG. 10-17 (A), and FIG. 10B is a sectional view taken along the line HH of FIG. 10-17 (A). 10-19 is a diagram illustrating a boundary between a base member and an LED substrate in FIG. 10-19, and a diagram showing a configuration of a second effect unit in FIG. 10B.

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the second effect unit 400 includes a base member 401, a cover member 402 arranged so as to cover the front surface side of the base member 401, and the front surface of the base member 401. Mainly composed of an LED board 403 attached to the LED board 403 and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED board 403, and as shown in FIG. 10-3, on the right side of the light guide plate 501, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 It is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 401 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material in a substantially half-moon shape when viewed from the front, and its surface (front-rear surface and peripheral surface) is white.

The LED substrate 403 has a substantially square shape in front view, and is attached to the front end of a boss projecting from the front surface of the base member 401. A plurality of second effect LEDs 404A and 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 403. Further, on the back surface of the LED substrate 403, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404C capable of irradiating light upward, a plurality of second effect LED 404D capable of irradiating light downward, and other electronic components (illustrated). (Omitted) is installed multiple times. The second effect LEDs 404A to 404D are angle-type LEDs capable of irradiating light in parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED substrate 403. Further, the surface of the LED board 403 (insulation portion excluding the printed wiring on the front surface and the back surface) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED substrate 403, and has a plurality of second production LEDs 404A arranged along the upper side of the front surface of the LED substrate 403. It is arranged between a plurality of second effect LEDs 404B arranged along the lower side of the front surface of the LED substrate 403, and light from the second effect LED 404A is incident on the front end surface from the second effect LED 404B. Light is incident on the rear end face.

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (A), the back surface of the inner lens 405 is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 406 for reflecting the light incident from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B toward the front. It is emitted forward substantially evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405. Since the front surface of the inner lens 405 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The reflecting portion 406 is formed in an uneven state (rough surface) in which the cross-sectional view of the light guided through the inside of the inner lens 405 in the traveling direction forms a substantially triangular wave shape with a constant pitch. Specifically, it is configured by a molding method in which an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the inner lens 405 by a stamper or injection. For example, a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, or an acrylic plate and reflection. The reflective portion may be configured by a sticking dot method in which a plate is attached with a dot-shaped adhesive material, a grooving method, or the like.

The cover member 402 has a box shape with a back opening made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403. At a position corresponding to the LED substrate 403 on the front surface of the cover member 402, a convex portion 410 having a slightly enlarged shape of the LED substrate 403 when viewed from the front is projected forward.

On the front surface of the convex portion 410, a decorative portion 420 composed of the letter "V" (logotype) is printed with a transparent colored paint or a transparent sheet on which the letters are printed is attached. As a result, it is provided so that light can be transmitted. Further, a light diffusing portion 402A formed of a concavo-convex portion is formed on the back surface of the convex portion 410 so that the light from the inner lens 405 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In the upper region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex strip portions 421A projecting to the back surface side are extended in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LED 404C. Further, in the lower region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex strip portions 421B projecting to the back surface side are extended in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LEDs 404D. It should be noted that a light diffusing portion made of an uneven portion may be formed also on a portion of the back surface of the cover member 402 where the convex portions 421A and 421B are not formed. Further, the cover member 402 is formed so as to incline rearward from the convex portion 410 toward the upper side and the lower side.

The plurality of convex portions 421A and 421B have uneven portions continuously formed on the rear end surfaces and stepped portions 421C formed in the middle position in the longitudinal direction, and are directed upward and downward from the convex portions 410. By extending the light so as to incline to the rear side, the light emitted upward and downward from the second effect LEDs 404C and 404D can be received from these uneven portions and the stepped portion 421C, and also enters. The emitted light is diffused by the uneven portion and emitted forward.

In this way, in the second effect unit 400, the light emitted from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is emitted forward by the inner lens 405 when the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B emit light, and the light emitted forward by the inner lens 405 is the convexity of the cover member 402. By being incident on the region corresponding to the portion 410, the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), the LED substrate 403 as an electronic component having the second effect LEDs 404A to 404D is arranged on the front side of the base member 401, and the front side thereof is formed by the cover member 402. It is covered. However, since the cover member 402 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, it is assumed that the light diffusing portion is formed in the portion of the cover member 402 other than the convex portions 421A and 421B from the player side. However, it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403 through the portions other than the convex portions 421A and 421B.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (B), by arranging the same white base member 401 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 403, the LED substrate 403 and the surrounding base member 401 Assimilated, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the cover member 402 becomes difficult to understand. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED board 403 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front surface of the convex portion 410 is a boundary between the LED substrate 403, which is an electronic component, and the base member 401 when visually recognized from the player side. It is provided at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and the lower side in the portion BD. That is, since a part of the decorative portion 420 is arranged so as to hang (overlap) the part of the boundary portion BD on the front side of the boundary portion BD, a part of the boundary portion BD is arranged by the decorative portion 420. By making it difficult to see, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 403, which should not be shown to the player from the viewpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side that can be seen from the player side, so that the degree of freedom in design is high. Can be enhanced.

Further, the decorative portion 420 is provided so that the area covering (overlapping) the front surface side of the boundary portion BD is larger than that of the decorative pattern 331 described above, and the boundary portion BD is made difficult to see, thereby making the LED substrate 403 difficult to see. Is obscured.

In this embodiment, the decorative portion 420 partially hangs (overlaps) at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and the lower side of the boundary portion BD when visually recognized from the player side. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portion 420 may be arranged at a position corresponding to all the portions of the boundary portion BD. It is preferable that the boundary portion BD is provided so as to overlap with about 1/3 or more of the boundary portion BD.

Further, since the character "V" is displayed as the logotype on the decorative portion 420, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and be aware of the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. Therefore, the LED board 403 becomes inconspicuous.

In the present embodiment, a form in which the letter "V" indicating a big hit is applied as a logotype is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "big hit", "BONUS", and "RUSH" are used. , A character indicating a variable display result, a character suggesting a big hit such as "heat", "extreme heat", "!!", or a character such as a game machine model name, a title, or a character name appearing. Further, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, patterns, patterns, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

Further, the LED substrate 403 has a second effect LED 404A as a light emitting means capable of causing the decorative portion 420 to emit light, so that the decorative portion 420 stands out due to the light emission, so that the player can use the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. Since it becomes difficult to be aware of the boundary portion BD with the LED substrate 403, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, the second effect LED 404A is provided with the decorative portion 420 capable of causing surface emission via the inner lens 405, so that the decorative portion 420 stands out due to the surface emission, so that the player can make the LED substrate 403. Since it becomes difficult to be aware of the boundary portion BD between the base member 401 and the base member 401, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, in the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the decorative portion 420 is used as one decorative portion composed of the letter “V” is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402 is not limited to this. When a plurality of decorative portions 420 are provided in the area of the cover member 402 and a plurality of predetermined decorative portions (for example, a pattern) having a mode different from that of the decorative portion 420 are provided in an area other than the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402, a plurality of decorations are provided. It is preferable that the number of portions is larger than that of a plurality of predetermined decorative portions. By doing so, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401 becomes difficult to see due to the plurality of decorative portions, and the number of the boundary portion BD becomes more conspicuous than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions provided in other areas. Therefore, the LED board 403 becomes inconspicuous.

In this case, it is sufficient that the plurality of decorative portions and the plurality of predetermined decorative portions have different modes. For example, the predetermined decorative portion may be an enlarged or reduced mode of the decorative portion, and the outer shape, the form, and the like. Any one of the colors, sizes, etc. may be different.

Further, the cover member 402 has a convex portion 410 which is a boundary corresponding region corresponding to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401, and a convex portion 410 which does not correspond to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. It has a region other than the convex portion 410, and the translucency of the convex portion 410 may be lower than the translucency of the region other than the convex portion 410. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to see the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401 through the convex portion 410, so that the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

(3rd production unit 600 and 4th production unit 800)
Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-20 to 10-26. 10-20 is a front view showing a third effect unit and a fourth effect unit in FIG. 10-20. 10-21 is a sectional view taken along the line I-I of FIG. 10-20, and FIG. 10-B is a sectional view taken along the line JJ of FIG. 10-20. 10-22 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK of FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing a visual state of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configurations of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-25 is a diagram showing an effect mode when the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit emit light. 10-26 are schematic front views showing a state in which the third effect unit is located at the origin position in FIG. 10-26 and a state in which the third effect unit is located in the effect position in FIGS. 10-26.

(Third production unit 600)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21 (A) and 10-26, the third effect unit 600 is a cover member arranged so as to cover the base member 601 and the front surface side of the base member 601. FIG. 10-26 (A) shows a light emitting effect unit 630 composed of a 602, an LED substrate 603 attached to the front surface of the base member 601 and an inner lens 605 arranged on the front surface side of the LED substrate 603, and a light emitting effect unit 630. ) And the effect motor 631 (see FIG. 10-2), which is a drive source capable of moving in the vertical direction between the origin position shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), and the effect motor 631. It has a power transmission member 632 for transmitting power to the light emitting effect unit 630, and as shown in FIG. 10-20, in the upper part of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, in front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. That is, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material into a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view, and its surface (front-rear surface and peripheral surface) is white.

The LED substrate 603 has a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view, and is attached to the front end of a standing wall projecting from the front peripheral edge of the base member 601. A plurality of third effect LEDs 604A, 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 603. The third effect LEDs 604A and 604B can irradiate light toward the front. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 603 (insulation portion excluding the printed wiring on the front surface and the back surface) is white. The cable C connecting the LED board 603 and the effect control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see FIGS. 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED substrate 603, and has a plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the front surface of the LED substrate 603 from the front side. Arranged to cover.

As shown in FIG. 10-21 (A), on the front surface and the back surface of the inner lens 605, the light from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the rear surface side is diffused and emitted toward the front. A light diffusing portion 605A composed of an uneven portion is provided so as to emit light from the surface.

The cover member 602 has a box shape with a back opening made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 601 and the LED substrate 603.

On the front surface of the cover member 602, a decorative portion 620 composed of the characters (logotype) of "XXX" is printed with a colored paint having a translucent color or a translucent sheet on which the characters are printed is attached. As a result, it is provided so that light can be transmitted. Further, a light diffusing portion 602A formed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 602 so that the light from the inner lens 605 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In addition, in this embodiment, an embodiment in which the character "XXX" indicating a big hit is applied as a logotype is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the model name, title, and appearance of the gaming machine appear. Characters such as the name of a character, characters indicating a variable display result such as "big hit", "BONUS", and "RUSH", and characters suggesting a big hit such as "heat", "super heat", and "!!" may be used. Further, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, patterns, patterns, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

In this way, in the third effect unit 600, when the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B emit light, the light emitted forward from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 is further covered with the cover member 602. The entire front surface of the cover member 602 including the decorative portion 620 emits light by being diffused through and emitted forward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A are arranged along the peripheral edge of the character "XXX" constituting the decorative portion 620, and the plurality of third effect LEDs 604B are decorative. It is arranged at a position that does not correspond to the portion 620. By arranging the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A along the peripheral edge of the character "XXX" constituting the decorative portion 620 in this way, when the third effect LED 604A emits light, the "XXX" Since the peripheral edge of the character is lit, the shape of the decorative portion 620 can be easily recognized.

Further, the power transmission member 632, which constitutes a part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light emitting effect unit 630, is rotatably supported by a rotation axis having one end facing the front-rear direction and emits light to the other end. Although the arm member is provided with the effect unit 630, the power transmission member can be changed in various ways, and if the power can be transmitted so that the light emission effect unit 630 can be moved in the vertical direction, a rack gear, a pinion gear, or the like can be used. There may be.

(4th production unit 800)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the fourth effect unit 800 includes a base member 801 and a cover member 802 arranged so as to cover the front surface side of the base member 801 and a base member. It is mainly composed of an LED substrate 803 mounted on the front surface of the 801 and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front surface side of the LED substrate 803, and as shown in FIG. 10-20, the area surrounded by the guide rails 211. In the upper left, the glass window 50a and the board plate 200 are visibly provided in front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 801 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material in a box shape having an open front surface, and a part of the peripheral edge thereof is formed in an arc shape along the guide rail 211. The surface (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surface) is white.

The LED substrate 803 is formed so as to have a smaller front view shape than the base member 801 and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801. A plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 803. The fourth effect LED 804 is an angle type LED capable of irradiating light in parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED substrate 803, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged along the peripheral edge portion on the front surface of the LED substrate 803. Further, the surface of the LED substrate 803 (insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front surface and the back surface) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, and is placed in a region surrounded by a plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 on the front surface of the LED substrate 803.

As shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), the back surface of the inner lens 805 is reflected forward by a reflecting unit 806 for reflecting the light incident from the fourth effect LED 804 toward the front. It is emitted forward substantially evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805. Since the front surface of the inner lens 805 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is formed of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front surface side of the base member 801 and the LED substrate 803. Specifically, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A of the portion of the standing wall erected on the front peripheral edge of the base member 801 along the guide rail 211, and the standing wall 801B other than the portion along the guide rail 211. It covers the front end. Further, a light diffusing portion 802A formed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 802 so that the light from the inner lens 805 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In this way, in the fourth effect unit 800, when the fourth effect LED 804 emits light, the light emitted forward from the fourth effect LED 804 through the inner lens 805 further passes through the cover member 802. By being diffused and emitted forward, the entire front surface of the cover member 802 emits surface light.

Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 10-24, in the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800, the surfaces of the base members 601, 801 and the LED substrates 603 and 803 are white, which are the same color, and these base members 601, respectively. The front surface side of the 801 and the LED substrate 603,803 is covered with a transparent cover member 602,802, and the light emitting effect body that emits light on the front surface by lighting the third effect LED 604A, 604B and the fourth effect LED 804. Has been done.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (A), the LED substrate 603 as an electronic component having the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B is arranged on the front side of the base member 601 and the front side thereof is covered. It is covered with a member 602. However, since the cover member 602 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the light diffusing portion 602A is formed on the cover member 602, the cover member 602 can be seen through from the player side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the back side, an inner lens 605 having a light diffusing portion 605A formed on the front and rear surfaces is provided on the back side so as to cover the LED substrate 603 from the front side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the LED substrate 603, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize the front surface.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A), the vertical wall of the same white base member 601 is arranged around (periphery) the white LED substrate 603, so that the LED substrate 603 is a base member around the white LED substrate 603. Assimilated with 601 it is difficult to understand the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 603 and the cover member 602. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED substrate 603 is provided on the base member 601 so that the LED substrate 603, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the LED substrate 803 as an electronic component having the fourth effect LED 804 is arranged on the front side of the base member 801 and is arranged on the front side thereof. Is covered with a cover member 802. However, since the cover member 802 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the light diffusing portion 802A is formed on the cover member 802, the cover member 802 can be seen through from the player side. It is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 801 and the LED substrate 803.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), by arranging the same white base member 801 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 803, the LED substrate 803 becomes a base member 801 around the white LED substrate 803. Assimilated, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 803 and the cover member 802 becomes difficult to understand. That is, it becomes difficult to understand that the LED substrate 803 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 801. Therefore, the LED substrate 803, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

However, the fourth effect LED 804 is an angle type LED that incidents light from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the peripheral edge of the LED substrate 803, so that the LED including the fourth effect LED 804 is included. Since the front side of the front peripheral portion of the substrate 803 is not covered with the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area where the reflecting portion and the light diffusing portion are formed than the inner lens 605, the player The visibility when the LED board 803 including the 4th effect LED 804 is visually recognized through the inner lens 805 from the side is the LED substrate including the 3rd effect LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 from the player side. It is higher than the visibility when the 603 is visually recognized. That is, the LED board 803 is more conspicuous than the LED board 603.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24, the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 10-20). ), And the arrangement position of the front surface in the front-rear direction is in front of the arrangement position of the front surface of the fourth effect unit 800 (on the player side) (see FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23), and further, the fourth While the light emitting mode of the effect unit 800 by the fourth effect LED 804 is surface emission, the light emission mode of the third effect unit 600 by the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B is spotlight (see FIGS. 10-25). In FIG. 10-25, the backgrounds of the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are shown in black for convenience of explaining the light emission mode.

As described above, the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when visually recognized from the player side, is located close to the player, and emits light with strong light. Therefore, the visibility when visually recognized from the player side is higher than that of the fourth effect unit 800. That is, the third effect unit 600, which is an effect means having higher visibility when viewed from the player side than the fourth effect unit 800, is provided at a position near the fourth effect unit 800. Since the third effect unit 600 is more conspicuously attracting the attention of the player than the four effect unit 800, the LED substrate 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth effect unit 800, is less conspicuous.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when visually recognized from the player side, and is located close to the player. , However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the third effect. The light emitting effect unit 630 of the unit 600 is visible because at least one of the size when visually recognized from the player side, the position with respect to the player, and the light emitting mode is different from the LED substrate 803 of the fourth effect unit 800. Should be high.

Further, the front surface of the light emitting effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600 as an effect means may be colored with a color having higher visibility than the surface color of the LED substrate 803, or a decorative part having a color having high visibility may be provided. By using the cover member 602 molded in a color having high visibility, the visibility of the light emitting effect unit 630 may be easily enhanced. Further, the visibility of the light emitting effect unit 630 may be easily enhanced by the light emitting mode (for example, lighting color, lighting mode, luminance, etc.) of the third effect LED 604A, 604B.

Further, as the effect means, an embodiment in which the light emission effect unit 630 of the third effect unit 600, which can emit light by the effect light means and can be operated by the effect motor 631, is applied, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be a light emitting means (lamp unit or the like) provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3, or an effect means that does not emit light by the light emitting means, or may be a predetermined drive source. It may be an effect unit that does not operate and is fixed at a predetermined position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23, a protruding portion 3A (eaves) protruding forward from the gaming board 2 and the glass window 50a is formed on the upper front surface of the gaming machine frame 3. The protrusion 3A is formed above the game area Y so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the game ball passing through the upper part of the game area Y, but the protrusion 3A greatly protrudes forward, for example, pachinko. In the state where the gaming machine 75SG001 is installed on the gaming island of the gaming field, the area E1 below the protruding portion 3A (the area indicated by the halftone dots in the figure) is blocked by the protruding portion 3A and becomes a shadow. It gets dark.

Therefore, since the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided at positions corresponding to the area E1 in the upper part of the game area Y, the LED boards 603 and 803 are easily mixed with the shadow of the protrusion 3A. So it will be less noticeable.

Further, above the LED boards 603 and 803, a protrusion 3A that protrudes toward the player from the LED boards 603 and 803 is provided, and the protrusion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603 and 803 (). (See FIG. 10-23), the LED substrates 603 and 803 become shadows of the protrusions 3A and become inconspicuous.

Further, the LED substrate 603,803 and the base members 601,801 are exemplified in the form of being white, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these may be dark colors (for example, black), as described above. By doing so, the LED substrates 603 and 803 and the base members 601, 801 are easily mixed with the shadow of the protruding portion 3A, so that they are less noticeable.

In the present embodiment, as a protrusion protruding toward the player above the electronic component and the specific member, a protrusion 3A protruding toward the player above the LED substrates 603 and 803 is applied. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the projecting portion is not limited to the projecting portion projecting from a part of the game machine frame 3, for example, the game board 2 or the game. It may be composed of other gaming devices (for example, a winning ball device) or a directing device provided in the area Y. Further, the protruding portion 3A is not only fixed to the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, but also operates from the origin position to the protruding position at a predetermined timing, so that the player can move above the electronic component and the specific member. It may be a protruding portion protruding to the side.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 10-26, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 is used when the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 of the third effect unit 600 operating on the back surface side of the light guide plate 501 move. It is formed so as to overlap with most of the moving region E2 (the region surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIGS. 10-26).

Specifically, the moving region E2 of the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 is a region in which the light emitting effect unit 630 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and is a region including the origin position and the effect position. When light is incident on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 is in a state of emitting light, and the display image of the rear image display device 5, the light emitting effect unit 630, and the power transmission member 632 are the light guide plate from the player side. It becomes difficult or invisible to see through 501. That is, the effect control CPU 120 lights the light guide plate LED 502 to emit light in a light emitting region during a movement period in which the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from at least the origin position to the effect position or an effect period in which the power transmission member 632 is located in the effect position. By executing the light emitting effect of emitting light of 506, the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 pass through the light guide plate 501 from the player side and become difficult or invisible to be visually recognized. It is possible to prevent the cable C (electronic component) or the like provided along the member 632 from being conspicuous.

Further, when the light guide plate LED 502 is turned off after the light emitting effect unit 630 is moved to the effect position and the light emitting effect of the light emitting region 506 is completed, the power transmission member 632, the cable C, and the like can be visually recognized, but the light emitting effect unit. By turning on the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of the 630 to make the light emitting effect unit 630 stand out, the power transmission member 632 and the cable C can be made inconspicuous.

Further, the electronic components (for example, the LED board 603 and the cable C) provided so as to be operable are made visible to the player during the waiting period or the moving period waiting at the origin position. However, it is preferable to make it difficult or invisible from the player side at least during the effect period located at the effect position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the electronic components from being conspicuous during the production period that the player pays attention to.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 of the feature portion 75SG of the present embodiment is
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player, and
Specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component, and
A translucent member (for example, a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a translucent member and is provided so that the player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member.
It is characterized by having.
By doing so, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are less noticeable due to the specific members of the same color, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
The electronic component and the specific member can be changed to any color as long as they have similar colors. Further, as in the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member have the same color (for example, black and black, white and white, etc.).

(Explanation of deformation and application of feature 75SG)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, in the feature unit 75SG of the above-described embodiment, light emitting diodes such as the first effect LED 304, the second effect LEDs 404A to 404D, the third effect LEDs 604A, 604B, and the fourth effect LED 804 are provided as electronic components. Although the embodiment in which the LED boards 303, 403, 603, and 803 are applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the circuit board without the light emitting diode (main board 11 not for directing, or directing) is not provided. Includes control boards 12 and relay boards), electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, connectors, cables (wiring), and boards and members that fix them.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 for arranging the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components are applied as specific members is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to a member constituting a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating an electronic component as described above, but is a member provided around the electronic component. If there is, a different member (for example, a member constituting a part of another unit, a game board 2 or a game machine frame 3) provided separately from the unit (device) for arranging or accommodating the electronic component. It may be a member constituting a part, etc.).

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 constituting a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating electronic components are applied as a translucent member is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a member having translucency even if it is not a member constituting a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating an electronic component as described above. If the member is provided so that the player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member, a different member (for example, for example) provided separately from the unit (device) for arranging or accommodating the electronic component. It may be a member that constitutes a part of another unit, a member that constitutes a part of the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3, and the like).

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the embodiment, the embodiment in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (same color) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, as long as the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color as described above, the electronic component and the specific member are not limited to the same color.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members are partially overlapped on the back surface side of the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components. Although the embodiment in which the non-overlapping portion is arranged around the LED substrate 303, 403, 603, 803 is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member are from the player side. It may be arranged side by side at least one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side without overlapping a part when visually recognized. Further, if the specific member is arranged and visible around the electronic component when visually recognized from the player side, the electronic component and the specific member are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the front-rear direction, and the like. It may have been done.

The specific member provided around the electronic component includes a specific member provided at a position visible from the player side together with the electronic component, and is arranged, for example, within a range of about 5 cm from the electronic component. Specific members may be included.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802 made of a translucent synthetic resin material is applied as a translucent member has been exemplified. The material is not limited, and any material may be used as long as it is a translucent member, and may be a glass material or the like. Further, if the electronic component and the specific member can be visually recognized by the player through the member, the electronic component and the specific member may be transparent or translucent, or may be colored in a predetermined color. Further, the light transmittance does not have to be 100% or a value close to 100%.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as the translucent members are the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components by the player through the member. The present invention exemplifies a form in which a part or the entire area of the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific member can be visually recognized, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the electronic component is the member. If at least a part of the specific member is not visible through the member, the electronic component and the specific member can be visually recognized together. You just have to.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as the translucent members are the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components, and the base member 301 as a specific member. Although the embodiment in which the electronic components and the specific members are arranged along the front side of the 401, 601 and 801 is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not necessarily limited to the electronic components and the specific members. It does not have to be. That is, the electronic component or the specific member may be arranged in a state of being slanted with respect to the translucent member.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the entire surface of the LED substrate 303, 403, 603, 803 and the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 has a predetermined color (black or white) is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the color of the portion of the electronic component and the specific member that can be seen through the translucent member (for example, the front color of the electronic component and the specific member) is a similar color. If so, the entire surface does not necessarily have to be a similar color. Further, the colors of these electronic components and specific members may be colored at the time of molding the members, may be colored by painting or printing after molding, or may be colored by attaching a sticker or the like to obtain a predetermined color. May be.

Further, in the feature portion 75SG of the embodiment, the embodiment in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (same color) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Not, for example, a predetermined electron provided so as to be difficult or invisible to the player, separately from the LED substrate 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component and the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific member. A component (for example, a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a solenoid 81, 82, etc.) and a predetermined member (for example, a first start port switch 22A, a second) provided around the predetermined electronic component. A predetermined electronic component (for example, a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a solenoid 81, 82, etc.) is provided with a start port switch 22B, a member for fixing the solenoids 81, 82, etc.). , It is preferable that the color is not similar to that of a predetermined member (for example, a member for fixing the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.).

As described above, the predetermined electronic components such as the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the solenoids 81 and 82 provided so as to be difficult to see or invisible to the player are in balance with the predetermined members for fixing them. Since a general-purpose product can be used without considering the above, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, by setting the color of the specific member to have the same hue and higher brightness or saturation of the color of the electronic component, the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component. Electronic components can be made relatively inconspicuous.

Further, by coloring the translucent member with a color similar to that of the electronic component and the specific member, the translucent member is assimilated with the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component can be made less noticeable.

Further, for example, when an electronic component such as a black LED board is arranged on the right side of the game board 2, it is provided around the electronic component on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side of the image display device 5. By providing an outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or a similar color as the electronic component so as to be visible to the player separately from the specific member, the black member is arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5 in a well-balanced manner. As a result, the electronic components can be made less noticeable because the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable. In this way, by arranging a member having the same color as or a similar color to the electronic component at a distant position separately from the specific member, the electronic component can be made less noticeable.

Further, the configuration related to the feature unit 75SG may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations related to the feature unit 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK and the like. For example, when the effect described by the feature units 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK can be executed by the image display device 5, the first effect unit 300 described by the feature unit 75SG provided around the image display device 5 Since the electronic components of the second effect unit 400, the third effect unit 600, and the fourth effect unit 800 are less noticeable, it is possible to make the above effect appear more suitable.

Specifically, for example, as described with reference to FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even in a period other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4. In this case, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using the first light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs, and the light emitting effect is executed when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like. In the case of controlling so as not to be performed, the periphery (for example, the game effect lamp 9) of the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303, 403, 603, 803) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301, 401, 601, 801) It may be controlled so that the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member provided at the position closer to the above) is not executed (or the light amount is lower than the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 or the like). By doing so, when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is restricted, the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member is executed, so that the electronic parts and the specific member are prevented from becoming conspicuous. can.

Further, among the second light emitting members provided around the electronic component and the specific member, the decorative portion 420 of the translucent member arranged on the front side of the electronic component and the specific member can be surface-emitting. For a light emitting member such as LED404A that is inconspicuous even if light emission is continued, the amount of light may be maintained (execution is not limited) even when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is controlled not to be executed. .. By doing so, it is possible to make the electronic components and specific members inconspicuous without reducing the effect of the effect too much.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1,75SG001 is exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls can be used. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside the game machine and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given according to the prize are added, while the number of game balls used in the game The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine in which is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified, and the variable display result is derived from the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the game machine capable of playing a game may be at least a machine that plays a game, and may be a general game machine as well as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 75SG001), which is an electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303, 403,) provided so as to be visible to the player. 603,803), a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component, and a member having translucency. A translucent member (for example, a cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) provided so that the player can visually see the electronic component and the specific member through the member, and the translucent member (for example). For example, the cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (for example, LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, base member 301) (for example, the decorative pattern 331). (See FIG. 10-12), and further, a storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201) capable of storing a game medium (for example, a game ball P) and a payout unit (for example, a payout unit) capable of paying out the game medium. The device 200) and the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage) having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage and a second guide passage) for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the discharge portion. The guide passage forming portion 202 and the second guide passage forming portion 204) and the cover portion provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320, A third cover body 330) is provided, and the cover portion limits the falling of the screw members (for example, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that have fallen on the cover portion to the guide passage forming portion. (For example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) were provided (see FIGS. 30 and 32), and the guide passage forming portion fell into the guidance passage forming portion. Examples thereof include a gaming machine provided with a plurality of specific limiting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the screw member to the payout portion (see FIGS. 19, 20, and 35).

According to such a configuration, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are inconspicuous due to the decorative pattern, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. Further, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

In other words, it is possible to make a gaming machine that looks good by increasing the degree of freedom in design, and it is also possible to make a gaming machine that is less likely to break down by preventing screw members from falling and mixing in the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion. be able to. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that looks good and does not easily break down when installed in a gaming field.

Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can increase the degree of freedom in design and prevent the screw member from being mixed in the guide passage forming portion or the payout portion, a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko game). Machine 1), a storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201) capable of storing a game medium (for example, a game ball P) and a payout unit (for example, a payout device 200) capable of paying out the game medium. ) And a guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage) having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage and a second guide passage) for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the discharge portion. The forming portion 202 and the second guiding passage forming portion 204) and the cover portion provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third). A cover body 330) is provided, and the cover portion is for limiting the falling of the screw members (for example, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that have fallen on the cover portion to the guide passage forming portion. A predetermined limiting portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) is provided (see FIGS. 30 and 32), and the guide passage forming portion has a screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion. A gaming machine is provided with a plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the above to the payout portion (see FIGS. 19, 20, and 35). Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

(form)
The gaming machine of form A1 is
A storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201) capable of storing a game medium (for example, a game ball P),
A payout unit (for example, a payout device 200) capable of paying out a game medium, and
A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the payout portion. And the second guide passage forming part 204),
It is characterized by having.

The gaming machine of the form A2 is the gaming machine according to the form A1.
A cover portion provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, a cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, a cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, and a cover portion of the third cover body 330). With 334)
The cover portion limits the falling of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that have fallen on the cover portion to the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). (For example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) are provided for this purpose (see FIGS. 30 and 32).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the form A3 is the gaming machine according to the form A2.
The predetermined limiting portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) is provided so as to be able to fall from the cover portion without retaining the game medium that has fallen on the cover portion. It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the game medium does not stay in the predetermined limiting portion, and the screw member can always be kept in a state where the screw member can stay. Therefore, the screw member dropped on the cover portion falls into the guide passage forming portion. Can be prevented from doing so.

The gaming machine of the form A4 is the gaming machine according to the form A2 or A3.
The predetermined limiting portion is a first retaining portion (for example, an elongated hole 316A) capable of retaining a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that has fallen on the cover portion on the cover portion. 316C) and a second retention portion (for example, concave grooves 326A to 326C).
The second stagnant portion is provided at a position closer to the payout portion (for example, the payout device 200) than the first stagnant portion, and is larger than the first stagnant portion (L22B> L21).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the screw member tends to stay in the retention portion as it approaches the payout portion, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A4.
The payout portion (for example, a payout device) of a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion in the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). A plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting movement to the 200) are provided (see FIGS. 20 and 35).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the form A6 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment A5.
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H).
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size capable of dropping the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion before reaching the payout portion. Has (L11> L2, see FIG. 19)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if a screw member is mixed in the guide passage forming portion, it can be dropped from the hole portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, so that the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion is mixed in the discharge portion. Can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game medium from being hindered by the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the form A7 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment A6.
The plurality of holes have different sizes.
The largest predetermined hole among the plurality of holes is provided at a position closest to the payout portion (for example, the left-right dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the left-right dimension of the other holes 271A to 271G. (See Fig. 20)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, it is possible to prevent the screw member dropped into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the discharge portion. ..

The gaming machine of the form A8 is the gaming machine according to the form A6 or A7.
On the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202), the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330). There is an uncovered area (eg, uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover section 334).
At least a part (for example, holes 271B to 271H) of the plurality of specific restriction portions is provided at a position corresponding to the uncovered region in the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 35).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the screw member is mixed into the guide passage forming portion from the uncovered region, it can be dropped from the hole portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of the embodiments A1 to A8.
A gaming frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201) is provided.
The reservoir is
It is arranged on the upper surface side of a predetermined portion (for example, the first protruding portion 224) of the game frame.
It is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that the screw member does not enter between the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30 <L1, see FIG. 27 (B)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion of the game frame and the storage portion and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of the form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A9.
A first substrate (for example, a main substrate 11, an effect control substrate 12, etc.) attached at a position lower than the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202).
A second substrate (for example, a terminal substrate 210) attached at a position above the guide passage forming portion,
Equipped with
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using a screw member, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member (for example, the board cases 11A, 12A and the like are mounted by a screw member. The terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a locking means including a plurality of regulating portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members. (See Fig. 25)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the embodiment A11 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment A10.
The second board is an external output board (for example, terminal board 210) to which wiring (for example, cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected.
The first board has a smaller number of wires connected than the external output board (for example, a plurality of connection hole portions 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide passage forming portion 202). The number of cables C that can be connected to the cable C is the first number (for example, 20), while the second main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide passage forming portion 202 are connected. Each signal line is also connected to the board, but the number is the second number (for example, 10 lines), which is less than the first number.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is easily subjected to external force during wiring connection work, cannot be attached by the screw member, and the screw member is disengaged due to the external force applied to the external output board. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the form A12 is the gaming machine according to the form A10 or A11.
A gaming frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201) and a gaming frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3).
A mounting frame (for example, a board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board on the game frame,
Equipped with
The mounting frame is characterized by having a mounting frame limiting portion (for example, a recess 242) for restricting the movement of a screw member that has fallen into the mounting frame to the guide passage forming portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion by utilizing the mounting frame of the external output board.

The gaming machine of the form A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of the embodiments A1 to A12.
The guide passage of a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has moved toward the guide passage forming portion around the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). A special limiting portion (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) for limiting the fall to the forming portion is provided (FIGS. 30 (C), 31 (A) (B), 32. reference)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the embodiment A14 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment A13.
The special restriction portion attaches a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that has moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the guide passage forming portion. It is a special retaining portion (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attached portion.
The screw member that has come off from the attached portion but has not retained in the special retaining portion can move toward the cover portion (see FIGS. 30 (C), 31 (A), (B), and 32).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the form A15 is the gaming machine according to the form A13 or A14.
The special retaining portion is a recess (for example, recess 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of accommodating at least a part of the screw member.
The depth of the recess is a depth at which a part of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is housed (see FIGS. 30 (C), 31 (A), (B), and 32).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the screw member staying in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of the form A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A15.
A cover portion (for example, a cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) is provided.
The cover portion is provided so as to incline downward toward the payout portion side.
A specific portion (for example, a ball stopper member 340) capable of retaining a screw member dropped on the cover portion in the cover portion is provided on the payout portion side in the inclined direction of the cover portion (FIG. 23, see FIGS. 34 and 35)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the form A17 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment A16.
The specific portion (for example, the ball stop member 340) has a first state that allows the game medium (for example, the game ball P) of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to flow down. It is possible to change to a second state in which the game medium of the guide passage forming portion is difficult to flow down or cannot flow down (for example, the rotating portion 341 is located in the upright position and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344. Then, in the first state where the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 can flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, the rotating portion 341 is located at the tilted position, and the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344. The game ball can be brought into contact with the game ball, and can be changed to a second state in which the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 cannot flow down (or is difficult to flow down) to the second guide passage forming portion 204.) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member is more likely to stay than in the first state (see FIG. 34).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the form A18 is the gaming machine according to the form A16 or A17.
The cover portion is
A first cover portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, concave grooves 326A to 326C, concave portions 336) provided with a retaining portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, concave grooves 326A to 326C) capable of retaining a screw member dropped on the cover portion on the cover portion (for example). For example, the cover portion 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320),
A second cover portion (for example, a cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided with the specific portion, which is different from the first cover portion.
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the form A19 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment A18.
The second cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) is attached by a screw member (for example, the screw member N16) having a locking portion (for example, the flange portion F) (FIG. 16). reference)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the form A20 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A19.
A gaming frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201) is provided.
The storage portion is attached to the game frame at a plurality of locations by a screw member having a locking portion (for example, screw members N11 to N14).
The screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the game frame is such that the screw member falls out of the guide passage forming portion even if it comes off the game frame. Installed (see Figure 16)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the screw member that attaches the storage portion is made difficult to come off from the game frame, while the screw member that attaches the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion falls out of the guide passage forming portion even if it comes off. It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the form A21 is the gaming machine according to the form A20.
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) and the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the gaming frame (for example, the gaming machine frame 3). Of these, the predetermined screw member (for example, the screw member N12) near the peripheral edge of the gaming machine is also used as the screw member for attaching the ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226) (see FIG. 16).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the form A22 is the gaming machine according to the form A20 or A21.
The screw member (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) is for reinforcing the game frame. It is attached to a metal member (for example, a metal plate 222) (see FIG. 16).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the reservoir can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of the form A23 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A20 to A22.
The screw member (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached to the upper position of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) has a screw member (for example, screw members N3 to N6). It is characterized in that it is a screw member different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the form A24 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A20 to A23.
The gaming frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) is provided with a detachable gaming board (for example, a gaming board 2).
In the region below the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game board, the upper surface of the inclined surface (for example, the cover body 220) on which the falling screw member can flow down. The wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 26 to 28 and 35).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen from the guide passage forming portion onto the game board from bouncing and being mixed into the guide passage forming portion again.

The gaming machine of the form A25 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A24.
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of the modified example 1) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) is provided.
The guide passage forming portion is
A first passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) extending downward so as to incline toward one side (for example, the left side), and
A second passage forming portion (for example, a second guide passage forming portion 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming portion, and a second passage forming portion.
Have,
The cover portion is provided along the first passage forming portion so that the screw member dropped on the cover portion moves and falls from the lower end portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion (FIG. 37 (FIG. 37). A) See)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the form A26 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A2 to A25.
Wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided at a position near the predetermined limiting portion (for example, the recess 361) in the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of the modified example 1) so as to intersect with the guide passage forming portion. (See Fig. 37 (B))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the screw member is easily caught in the wiring and stays in the predetermined limiting portion.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the back structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. FIG. 11 is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 12 is a left side view showing a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 13 is a plan view showing a frame for a gaming machine to which a gaming board is attached. FIG. 14 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko gaming machine is viewed from diagonally behind. FIG. 15 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming board is removed from the gaming machine frame. The glass door frame 50 is not shown in FIGS. 13 to 15.

As shown in FIGS. 11 to 15, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a gaming board 2, a gaming machine frame 3 to which the gaming board 2 is detachably provided, and the game centering on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. It has a glass door frame 50 provided so that the front surface of the machine frame 3 can be opened and closed, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 that supports the game machine frame 3 so as to be openable and closable around the left side. By fixing the outer frame 60 to the game island (not shown) installed in the game island, it can be installed on the game island.

At the upper part of the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3, a replenishment device 150 (FIGS. 11 and 12) is provided from a circulation path of a gaming ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a gaming ball P) provided inside a gaming island (not shown). A ball tank forming unit 201 that forms a storage unit capable of storing game balls supplied via the ball tank forming unit 201, and a first guide passage that guides the game balls stored in the ball tank forming unit 201 toward the left side are formed. The first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first passage forming body 203 including the first guide passage forming portion 202 are extended in the left-right direction along the upper side portion 3A of the gaming machine frame 3. Further, a terminal board 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide passage forming portion 202.

The replenishing device 150 sends out a predetermined number (for example, 10 or the like) of a guiding member 150A composed of a nozzle or the like capable of guiding the gaming ball in the circulation path of the gaming island and the gaming ball guided by the guiding member 150A. The sprocket (not shown), the drive source for driving the sprocket (not shown), and the opening of the outer frame 60 are pressed against the gaming machine frame 3 when the opening is closed by the gaming machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the gaming machine frame 3 in the closed state, the gaming ball sent out by the sprocket is the ball tank forming portion 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the gaming machine frame 3 in the open state, the gaming ball delivered by the sprocket is held so that it cannot be dropped. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming unit 201 decreases while the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the sprocket is rotated by the drive source and a predetermined number of game balls are sent out by the ball tank forming unit 201. It is designed to be supplied to. Further, in the replenishment device 150, a case body 150B is configured by assembling a plurality of members with a plurality of screw members (not shown), and the case body 150B uses a plurality of screw members (not shown) to form a game island. It is fixed in place.

Further, a second guide passage forming portion 204 forming a second guide passage that guides the game ball guided to the left side by the first guide passage forming portion 202 and a game guided by the second guide passage forming portion 204. A payout device 200 constituting a payout unit capable of paying out balls and a game ball paid out by the payout device 200 are guided to an upper plate, that is, a payout passage for paying out the game ball to a player is formed. Pachinko game to discharge the game ball guided by the payout passage forming unit 205 and the second guide passage forming part 204 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 without paying out from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205. A second passage forming body 207 including a ball pulling passage forming portion 206 for forming a ball pulling passage to be guided to a discharge portion (not shown) provided in the lower portion on the back surface side of the machine 1 is a frame 3 for a gaming machine. It extends vertically along the left side of the back of the building.

The payout device 200 is composed of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has a sprocket for paying out game balls by a predetermined number of balls (for example, one ball), a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game. A switching valve that can switch the flow path of the ball between the payout passage and the ball removal passage, an operation lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Further, in the lower part of the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3, a board case 91A in which the power supply board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which the payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided.

In the present embodiment, a ball-out switch (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided at a predetermined position in the second guide passage, and the CPU 103 detects a detection signal from the ball-out switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there is a game ball for paying out in the second guide passage on the upstream side of the payout device 200. Then, when the off state of the ball out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined time or longer, it is determined that the game ball is not supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as a ball jam, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and the payout is performed. The payout operation by the device 200 is stopped. Further, by displaying a replenishment error on a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 and outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 is connected to the glass door frame 50. It is possible to execute a notification process indicating that a replenishment error has occurred, such as by causing the game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined position on the front surface to emit light in an error mode.

As shown in FIG. 15, the gaming board 2 is detachably arranged from the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in the opening 221 formed in the substantially central portion of the gaming machine frame 3. The game board 2 includes a plate-shaped body 2a composed of the above-mentioned board surface plate and a spacer member, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, winning devices, etc.) provided on the front surface side of the plate-shaped body 2a, and a plate-shaped body 2a. Electronic components such as an image display device 5 provided on the back side of the above, an effect device having a movable body 32, a substrate case 12A in which an effect control board 12 is housed, a board case 11A in which a main board 11 is housed, and a plate shape. It is a structure including a cover body 220 that protects a part, an effect device, an electronic component, and the like.

The substrate cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are configured so that each substrate can be housed inside by a base member and a cover member made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and among these, the substrate cases 11A, 12A have. The board cases 91A and 37A are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 or the gaming board 2 by one or a plurality of screw members N20 and N21 (see FIG. 11), respectively, and the substrate cases 91A and 37A are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Alternatively, it is attached to the game board 2. Further, the cover body 220 is formed in a box shape in which the front surface is opened by a transparent synthetic resin material, and a part of the back surface is an opening / closing portion 220A that can rotate around the right side, and is one of the back surfaces of the game board 2. The part can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the first passage forming body 203 and the second passage forming body 207 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3 and the cover body 220 constituting the back surface of the gaming board 2 are used for gaming. In a state where the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3, the outer frame 60 protrudes rearward from the outer frame 60. In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided so that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged at the rear position of the upper plate of the outer frame 60 in the upper part of the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3. In a state where the outer frame 60 of the gaming machine 1 is fixed to the gaming island (not shown), the gaming ball can be supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 from the circulation path above the gaming island via the supply device 150. ..

(Mounting structure of the first passage forming body 203)
Next, the structure for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view showing a structure for attaching the passage forming body to the frame for a gaming machine. FIG. 17 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper part of the back surface of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and an opening 221 for mounting the gaming board 2 is formed, and is above the opening 221. A metal plate 222 for reinforcement is provided on the back surface of the upper side portion 3A so as to face in the left-right direction. Further, on the back surface of the metal plate 222, a mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 is mounted.

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so that the metal plate 222 can be covered from the back side, and the screw members N1 to N5 mounted from the back side to a plurality of mounting holes H1 to H5 facing in the front-rear direction are attached to the metal plate 222. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by being screwed into each of the formed plurality of screw holes. On the right side of the mounting member 223, a plate-shaped first protruding portion 224 is projected rearward, and on the left side of the mounting member 223, the upper wall portion 225A, the rear wall portion 225B, and the left and right side wall portions 225C are formed. A three-dimensional second protruding portion 225 is projected rearward.

The first protruding portion 224 protrudes rearward from a position below the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225, and the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged on the upper side thereof. Further, a first guide passage forming portion 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall portion 225B of the second protruding portion 225, and a board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted on the upper side thereof. ing. The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side in the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper part in a state where the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. The screw member N6 is screwed into the screw hole formed in the mounting member 223 to be mounted on the mounting member 223.

As described above, the mounting member 223 is formed so as to cover the upper part of the game board 2 by having the first protruding portion 224 and the second protruding portion 225 protruding rearward. Therefore, it is prevented that the game ball or the like supplied from the upper part of the game island to the ball tank forming portion 201 enters the game board 2. That is, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2.

The first passage forming body 203 has a plurality of screw members N11 to N14 mounted from the back side in the plurality of mounting holes H11 to H14, and a plurality of screw members N15 mounted from above in the mounting holes H15 in the mounting member 223. It is attached to the attachment member 223 by being screwed into each screw hole. The screw member N12 to be attached to the mounting hole H12 is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 for removing electricity charged in the first passage forming body 203 to the first passage forming body 203. Further, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper portion of the first passage forming body 203. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing the screw member N16 attached to the mounting hole H16 from above into the screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. There is.

As shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 16, the above-mentioned screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are composed of a male screw portion NS and a head NH, of which the screw members N1, N2 and N11 to N16 are heads. A flanged screw in which a flange portion F as a locking portion is integrally formed on the seat surface of the seat surface. By widening the contact area of the seat surface and increasing the frictional force, it is harder to loosen than the screw members N3 to N6. It is a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the threaded members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 is about 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is about 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is the head NH. It is said that the diameter is about 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2.

The sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to the above-mentioned dimensions. Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 made of a flanged screw are screw members integrally formed with a flange portion F (washer), but instead of the flange portion F, a washer separate from the screw member. May be attached to the screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that is separated from the attached portion when loosened. Further, the loosening prevention portion also includes a rotation stopper portion of the head NH and an adhesive and the like formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer).

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the first passage forming body 203 needs to receive and store the game ball supplied from above the game island by the ball tank forming portion 201, and also needs to store the first passage forming body 203. In the above, the upper surface is formed in a concave shape so that the ball clogging is less likely to occur and the upper surface can be easily cleared when the ball clogging occurs.

Further, the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of the ball tank forming portion 201 where the game balls overlapping and staying in the vertical direction flow into the first guide passage forming portion 202. The game ball is arranged so as to cover the upper surface of the third cover body 330 at the position where the first guide passage forming portion 202 flows into the second guide passage forming portion 204. Is designed to be rectified. However, a part of the upper surface opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered by the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330, but the ball tank forming portion 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( The top opening of FIG. 35) is open.

On the other hand, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 to be attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223 are arranged in the vicinity of the periphery of the first passage forming body 203. Further, above the pachinko gaming machine 1 fixed to the gaming island, a screw member (not shown) for assembling a skeleton or the like constituting the gaming island, and various devices arranged inside the gaming island (for example,). A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishment device 150 and the like to the skeleton and the like, and a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body of various devices are arranged.

When these screw members loosen and fall off due to vibration or impact generated in the gaming island or pachinko gaming machine 1, they roll due to vibration or impact or opening / closing of the gaming machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first There is a possibility that it may fall inward from the uncovered region 350 of the guide passage forming portion 202 and be mixed into the guide passage of the game ball. In particular, the replenishment device 150 and the like are arranged in the vicinity directly above the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, and by sending a predetermined number of game balls to the ball tank forming portion 201, the game island Since it is a device that easily vibrates when a new game ball is supplied from the circulation path of the game machine or when the game machine frame 3 opens and closes, a screw member for attaching the replenishment device 150 to the frame of the game island or the like ( (Not shown) or when a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishment device 150 loosen and fall off due to vibration, the inside of the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202. Very likely to fall into.

Then, when the screw member falls on the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 side together with the flow of the game ball and finally be mixed in the payout device 200. When the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket and the switching valve may be damaged by the screw member, the ball may be clogged and the payout motor may be loaded and malfunction, or the screw member may be damaged together with the game ball. There was a risk that the player would feel uncomfortable or distrustful.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is mixed with the payout device 200, and the payout device 200 is damaged or malfunctions, or the screw member is formed together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to prevent the player from being paid out.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 24. 18A is a plan view showing a first passage forming body, and FIG. 18B is a rear view showing a first passage forming body. 19A is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 18A, FIG. 19B is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 18A, and FIG. 19C is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 18A. It is a figure. 20A and 20B are a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and FIG. 20B is a sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 20A. 21A is a plan view showing a first cover body, FIG. 21B is a sectional view taken along the line EE of FIG. 21A, and FIG. 21C is a sectional view taken along the line FF of FIG. 21A. 22A is a plan view showing a second cover body, FIG. 22B is a sectional view taken along the line GG of FIG. 22A, and FIG. 22C is a sectional view taken along the line HH of FIG. 22A. 23 is a plan view showing the third cover body in FIG. 23, FIG. 23 is a sectional view taken along the line II of FIG. 23A, FIG. 23C is a sectional view taken along the line JJ of FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a cover body, and FIG. 3E is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. 24A and 24B are vertical cross-sectional views showing a first guide passage forming portion showing a state in which the ball stopping member is in the first state, and FIG. 24B is a first showing a state in which the ball stopping member is in the second state. It is a vertical sectional view which shows the guide passage formation part.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material, and has an upper surface formed by a bottom wall portion 203A and a standing wall portion 203B erected on the peripheral edge of the bottom wall portion 203A. It is formed in a concave shape or a concave groove shape with an opening, and has a ball tank forming portion 201 arranged on the right side and a first guide passage forming portion 202 arranged on the left side. The ball tank forming portion 201 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed from an upstream portion extending diagonally rearward from the left side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and a downstream portion extending in the left-right direction. Become. The dimension in the front-rear direction of the ball tank forming portion 201 is longer than the dimension in the front-rear direction of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and more game balls can be stored than the first guide passage forming portion 202. Has been done. Further, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to gradually incline downward from the left side of the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the bottom wall portion 203A is supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201. The game ball naturally flows down toward the left side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202.

A mounting piece 261 facing in the vertical direction is projected on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B on the right side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 facing in the front-rear direction are vertically formed in the mounting piece 261. .. Further, a mounting piece 265 is projected from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and the mounting piece 265 is formed with a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction. A mounting piece 262 facing in the vertical direction is projected on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B on the left side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 is projected forward on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B on the front side of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 263.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing the plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into the screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. Further, a recess 280 having a substantially square shape in a plan view is formed at a position near the rear of the mounting piece 263 on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, holes 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall portion 203A and the rear standing wall portion 203B in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 (. See FIG. 19 (A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed at substantially the center of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B toward the downstream side. Further, in the bottom wall portion 203A of the downstream end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, a connecting hole 272 for dropping a game ball is formed through the lower second guide passage forming portion 204. ..

In the middle of the first guide passage forming portion 202, a meandering portion 273 that causes the game ball to meander in the front-rear direction and flow down toward the left side is formed, and among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, the holes 271B to 271F are formed. Is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273. By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure due to the following ball is prevented from increasing.

Further, the separation dimension L10 of the lower portions of the standing wall portions 203B and 203B before and after the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (about 11 mm) of the game ball and is twice the diameter (about 22 mm). It is shorter than (11 mm <L10 <22 mm). That is, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed so that the game ball can be guided in a row toward the downstream side.

Since the front-rear dimensions L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B are slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N3 to N6 described above (L11> L2), the screw members N3 to are described later. Even when N6 is mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can fall from the holes 271A to 271H. Further, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest left-right dimension L12 (dimension in the flow direction of the game ball) as compared with the other holes 271A to 271G, the screw members N3 to N6 are the connecting holes 272. Can be reliably dropped out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 before reaching.

That is, these hole portions 271A to 271H form a specific restriction portion for restricting the movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200. Since dust and dirt other than the screw member, or some member can also fall from these plurality of holes 271A to 271H, it is possible to prevent ball clogging.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 21 (A) to 21 (C), the first cover body 310 is extended along the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B on the front side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and is the upper end of the vertical wall portion 203B. A mounting portion 311 having a U-shaped cross-sectional view that can be fitted from above, a standing wall portion 312 extending from the right side of the mounting portion 311 toward the rear side, and a vertical wall portion 312 extending from the lower part to the right side (ball tank formation). A plate-shaped ball holding portion 313 extending downward so as to be inclined downward toward the portion 201 side), and a cover portion 314 extending from the lower portion of the standing wall portion 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming portion 202 side). It is mainly composed of a plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D formed so as to be elastically deformable on the front side of the portion 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover portion 314.

In the first cover body 310 configured in this way, the mounting portion 311 is attached to the ball tank forming portion 201 in a state where the vertical wall portion 312 is arranged near the boundary between the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. By fitting from above to the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 26) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged so as to cover a part of the downstream side of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above, and the cover portion 314 is one on the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The portion is covered from above, and the upper surface of the cover portion 314 is arranged so as to be slightly inclined downward toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 side (see FIG. 17).

In a state where the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming portion 201 side, so that the game island (not shown) becomes the ball tank forming portion 201. Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to be stacked in the vertical direction, when the game balls flow down to the first guide passage forming portion 202 side, they are rectified by being pressed downward by the ball holding portion 313. It is supposed to be done.

In the cover portion 314, elongated holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction forming a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view are formed so as to penetrate vertically in a state of being arranged in a row so as to be parallel to each other. The front and rear dimensions L21 of each of the elongated holes 316A to 316C are all the same, and the front and rear dimensions L21 are shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above are described above. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21 <2R, L21 <L2). That is, the elongated holes 316A to 316C are formed in such a size that the game ball and the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 cannot be dropped. Reinforcing ribs hang down from the peripheral edges of the elongated holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314.

Further, since the elongated holes 316A to 316C are extended along the flow direction of the gaming ball, the gaming ball P falls on the upper portions of the elongated holes 316A to 316C as shown in FIGS. 21B and 21C. If so, the game ball P can move in the flow direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 22 (A) to 22 (C), the second cover body 320 has a plate-shaped cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and a cover portion. It is mainly composed of a plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B formed elastically deformably on the front and rear sides of the 324, and the right end portion of the cover portion 324 is attached to the left end portion of the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310. The first passage forming body 203 is formed by elastically locking the plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B to the locked portions 317 (see FIG. 28) formed on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 302B in a state of being close to each other. Can be attached to. In the attached state, the cover portion 324 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flow direction of the game ball (FIG. 17). reference).

Recessed grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed on the upper surface of the cover portion 324 in a state of being arranged in a row with each other. The concave grooves 326A to 326C have different front-rear dimensions L22A to L22C, but are shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A to L22C <2R). The front-rear dimension L22B of the central concave groove 326B having the longest front-rear dimension is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above (L22B> L2). That is, the concave groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate the game ball and can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L22B of the concave groove 326B is longer than the front-rear dimension L21 of the elongated holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B> L21).

Further, since the front-rear dimension L22A of the concave groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the concave groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B> L1, L22C> L1). ), At least the size is such that the male threaded portion NS can be accommodated.

Further, since the concave grooves 326A to 326C are extended along the flow direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the flow direction of the game ball, FIGS. 22 (B) and 22 (C). As shown in the above, when the game ball P falls on the upper part of the concave grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the flow direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 23 (A) to 23 (C) and FIG. 24, the third cover body 330 has a plate-shaped cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. , Mounting that is projected from above between a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D formed elastically deformably on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334 and the locking portions 335C and 335D on the back surface, and the screw member N15 is mounted from above. It is mainly composed of a mounting portion 331 in which a hole H15 is formed and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end portion of the upper surface of the cover portion 334, and a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D at the left end of the cover portion 324 are vertically walled. It is elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 28) formed on the outer surface of the portion 302B, and the screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the screw hole provided on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B. By entering, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the cover portion 334 covers the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flow direction of the game ball (see FIG. 17).

The cover portion 334 extends diagonally upward from the left side to the right side, and a recess 336 having a predetermined depth extends from the right end portion on the upper surface to the left side. Since a part on the right side approaches the meandering portion 273, it is formed corresponding to the shape of the meandering portion 273. Further, by forming a slit 337 having a horizontally long U-shape in a plan view at a position corresponding to the recess 336, a straightening vane 338 that can be elastically deformed so that the left end side swings in the vertical direction is formed. At the right end, an inclined plate portion 339 that inclines downward toward the right side is formed, so that the game balls P stacked vertically are leveled while being guided toward the bottom wall portion 203A. (See FIG. 24).

The front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above (L23). > 2R, L23> L2). That is, the recess 336 is formed in a size capable of accommodating the game ball P and the head NHs of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-rear dimension L22B of the concave groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23> L22B).

Further, since the recess 336 is extended along the flow direction of the game ball and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flow direction of the game ball, the recess 336 is as shown in FIG. 23 (D). When the game ball P falls on the upper part of the 336, the game ball P is guided in the flow direction (left side).

Further, since the front-rear dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above (L24 <L2), the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 ~ N16 does not fall from the slit 337.

The ball stopper 340 includes a plate-shaped front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape in the rear view, a rear wall portion 341B arranged on the back side of the front wall portion 341A, and a front wall portion 341A and a rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating portion 341 having a left wall portion 341C to be connected, a protruding wall portion 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall portion 341C, and a cylindrical shaft portion 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing portions 343A and 343B that rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft portion 342 are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover portion 334. Further, a slit 344 into which the front wall portion 341A can be inserted is formed on the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334.

As shown in FIG. 24, when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the cover portion 324 covers the upper part of the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Since the cover portion 324 is arranged so as to incline downward toward the downstream side (left side) so as to approach the bottom wall portion 203A, the game balls P stacked vertically in the first guide passage forming portion 202 are placed. It is leveled while flowing down so that it can finally flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. In particular, since the rectifying plate 338 can be elastically deformed when the game balls come into contact with each other, the rectifying plate 338 is leveled (rectified) so as to push the game balls downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stop member 340)
As shown in FIG. 24A, the ball stop member 340 is rotatable between an upright position in which the rotating portion 341 stands upright and an inclined position in which the rotating portion 341 tilts to the right, and the rotating portion 341 Is located in an upright position, and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the rotation. The portion 341 is located at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 cannot flow down (or flows down) to the second guide passage forming portion 204. It is possible to change to the second state (difficult), that is, the ball stop state.

By setting the ball stop member 340 in the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second guide passage forming portion 204, and therefore, in this state, the game in the second guide passage forming portion 204. It is possible to remove the ball and remove the payout device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24A, when the ball fixing member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C are formed. The space portion surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in a plan view functions as a retention portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can stay, as will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 24 (B), when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state, the rotating portion 341 is tilted, but the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the protruding wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 with reference to FIG. 25. 25 is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, FIG. 25 is a KK cross section of (A), and FIG. 25 (C) is an LL cross section of (B). ..

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 25, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and a cable connection portion (not shown) to which a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 or the like is attached / detached to the back surface (not shown). ), And a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection hole portions 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 11) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. A connection pinch (not shown) for sandwiching the tip of each cable C is provided at a position corresponding to each connection hole portion 231 inside the mounting member 232. A spring (not shown) for urging the connection pinch in the closing direction, that is, in the direction of sandwiching the tip of the cable C is provided. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation units 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the urging force of the spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide passage forming portion 202 is the first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to the second substrate such as the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12 provided below the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the number of the second is smaller than the first number. The number is (for example, 10).

A plurality of the operation portions 233 are provided corresponding to each connection hole portion 231 and have a substantially hook shape in a side view, and are swung in the front-rear direction with the base end side thereof as a swing axis. When opening the connection pinch (not shown), the connection pinch (not shown) is released by pushing the operation unit 233 upward or downward to swing the operation unit 233. Then, when the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole 231 with the connection pinch open and the pressing operation of the operation unit 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the urging force of the spring (not shown). The cable C will be held. The operation units 233 arranged in the left-right direction have different shapes alternately in the left-right direction so that the adjacent operation units 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation when the predetermined operation unit 233 is pressed. There is.

The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side in the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper part in a state where the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. The screw member N6 is screwed into the screw hole formed in the mounting member 223 to be mounted on the mounting member 223. Further, the board mounting frame 211 is formed with a horizontally long rectangular opening 234.

On the inner surface of the board mounting frame 211, a plurality of restricting portions 235 that regulate the forward movement of the terminal board 210 by locking to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 inserted from the front side, and the restricting portion 235 forward. A plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked to the peripheral edge of the terminal board 210 whose movement is restricted from the front side, and a positioning piece 237 that abuts on the peripheral edge of the terminal board 210 to determine the arrangement position. Have. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and the locking portion 236 is elastically locked in a state where the movement to the front is restricted by the plurality of regulating portions 235, thereby mounting the board. It is attached to the frame 211. That is, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a plurality of regulating portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw member (by a mounting method different from the mounting method using the screw member). Can be installed.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which the cables C can be connected, the operation unit 233 corresponding to each cable C is formed during the wiring work for connecting the plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231. Need to be operated. Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island and the clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 for inspection or the like, the cable C hanging from the upper part of the game island becomes an outer frame. The connection may be tensioned by being routed forward of the 60. That is, since the terminal board 210 tends to be loaded on the mounting portion, when the terminal board 210 is mounted on the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 by the screw member, the screw member loosens and easily comes off. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is mounted by a mounting method that does not use the screw member. ing.

Further, in a state where the terminal board 210 is mounted on the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole portion 231 and the operation portion 233 of the terminal board 210 face the rear side from the opening 234 (see FIG. 25A). ). Further, since the plurality of operation units 233 project substantially horizontally toward the rear, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation units 233 arranged side by side as described later. Further, a recess 242 capable of accommodating the screw members N3 to N6 is formed between the lower portion of the terminal board 210 and the front portion of the board mounting frame 211.

(Mounted state of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 29. FIG. 26 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame is viewed from diagonally behind. 27A is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame, and FIG. 27B is a sectional view taken along the line MM of FIG. 27A. FIG. 28 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame is viewed from diagonally behind. FIG. 29 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame. 30A is a sectional view taken along the line NN of FIG. 29, FIG. 30B is a sectional view showing a rotational state of the screw member, and FIG. 30C is a sectional view taken along the line OO of FIG. 29. 31 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP of FIG. 29, and FIG. 31B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ of FIG. 29. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR of FIG. 29. FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS of FIG. 29. In FIG. 34, (A) is a staying state of the screw member when the ball fixing member is in the first state, (B) is a TT cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is a second state of the ball fixing member. The stagnant state of the screw member at the time of (D) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line UU of (C). FIG. 35 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the movement state of the screw member. FIG. 36 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover portion.

As shown in FIGS. 17, 26 and 27 (A), the ball tank forming portion 201 on the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3 and its periphery are screw members N1 to for mounting the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222. Screw members N11, N12, and N15 for attaching N2 and the first passage forming body 203 to the attachment member 223 are attached.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached to the right side from the ball tank forming portion 201 and from the back surface side to the front at a position below the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B in the ball tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 loosen and fall out backward due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely unlikely that they will fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 26. ..

Because the screw members N11 and N12 are attached from the back side to the front on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B on the right side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper end edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 loosen and fall out backward due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely unlikely that they will fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 26.

Since the screw member N15 is attached from the upper side to the lower side on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B on the right side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper end edge of the ball tank forming portion 201, the pachinko game Even if the screw member N15 loosens and falls off upward due to vibration or impact generated in the machine 1, it is extremely unlikely that the screw member N15 will fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 26.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 form a ball tank in which the game balls supplied by the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island are received and stored, and the load of a large number of game balls is applied. Since it is arranged around the portion 201, vibration and impact are likely to occur. Therefore, a threaded member with a flange is used because the contact area with the attached portion is large and loosening is unlikely to occur.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the ball tank forming portion 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 even if they loosen and fall off, that is, the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201. Since it is arranged below the island, it may be mixed into the ball tank forming portion 201 which opens upward to receive and store the game ball supplied by the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. It is suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), the ball tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-shaped first protruding portion 224 that protrudes rearward in the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first protruding portion 224 is shorter than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the threaded member (L30 <L1), so that the bottom is arranged. It is unlikely that the screw member is sandwiched between the wall portion 203A and the first protruding portion 224 and is held in the vicinity of the ball tank forming portion 201.

Further, the gap L31 formed between the rear portion of the bottom wall portion 203A of the ball tank forming portion 201 and the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 is formed from the head L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F. (L3> L2), the flanged screw member is hardly caught in the gap L31 and held in the vicinity of the ball tank forming portion 201.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27 (B), if the screw member N15 falls out of the mounting hole H15 as the mounted portion and falls on the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall portion 220H Since the screw member N15 that has fallen flows down to either the rear or the left due to the downward inclination toward the back surface side, it is hardly held in the vicinity of the ball tank forming portion 201. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member N15 from being mixed into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, 91A provided below the ball tank forming portion 201 and contacting the wiring of the substrate to cause disconnection or the like. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 17, 28 and 29 (A), in and around the first guide passage forming portion 202, screw members N3 to N5 for mounting the mounting member 223 on the metal plate 222, and a substrate. The screw member N6 for mounting the mounting frame 211 to the mounting member 223, the screw members N13 and N14 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223, and the third cover body 330 are attached to the first guide passage forming portion 202. A screw member N16 for attaching to the screw member N16 is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front side and are directed from the back side to the front at a position above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B in the first guide passage forming portion 202. The second protruding portion 225 of the mounting member 223 is arranged between the mounting positions of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, whereby the screw member is mounted. Although the first guide passage forming portion 202 is separated to some extent from the mounting positions of N3 to N6, the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so that the pachinko gaming machine When the screw members N3 to N6 loosen and fall out backward due to the vibration or impact generated in 1, the first one moves toward the rear on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 as shown in FIG. 28. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is mounted in the mounting hole H3. Further, at the position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a concave groove 227 for avoiding interference with the head NH when the screw member N3 is mounted on the mounting hole H3 is linear toward the rear. It is extended to. The concave groove 227 is formed so that the left-right width is tapered toward the rear side and becomes shallow. However, the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A is inclined downward toward the back side, so that the concave groove is formed. The bottom surface of the 227 is substantially horizontal (or slightly inclined downward toward the back surface side).

Therefore, if the screw member N3 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out backward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N3 will fall into the concave groove 227 on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 (FIG. FIG. 30 (A)). Further, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the concave groove 227 is likely to be guided to move linearly toward the rear when vibration or impact occurs, but the concave groove 227 is substantially horizontal toward the rear. The screw member N3 is less likely to move backward as compared with the region other than the concave groove 227. That is, the concave groove 227 constitutes a special limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member N3 moving toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to the first guiding passage forming portion 202.

Here, all the screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of the head NH and the male screw portion NS, and when they fall on the upper surface of the flat upper wall portion 225A, the peripheral edge of the head NH and the male screw portion NS Since the screw member N3 tilted as shown in FIG. 30B often vibrates or impacts because the posture is often tilted when the two points are in contact with the tip (see FIG. 30A). Occasionally, the head NH may rotate around the tip of the male screw portion NS so as to shake its head, and its direction may change. Therefore, if it falls on a flat surface other than the concave groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the concave groove 227, it may move linearly toward the rear or the head. The NH may move to turn to the left or right by rotating like shaking its head. That is, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 28, when the vehicle moves so as to bend to the right toward the rear, it is highly likely that it falls on the first cover body 310, and when it moves linearly toward the rear, it is the first. There is a high possibility that the cover body 320 will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 in front of the first guide passage when the cover body 320 is moved so as to bend to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the concave groove 227 and then moves so as to bend to the right toward the rear, the first cover body. There is a high possibility that it will fall onto the cover portion 314 of 310. As shown in FIG. 30A, when the screw member N3 falls on the cover portion 314, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male screw portion NS intersects the elongated holes 316A to 316C, or the male screw portion NS becomes Although it is inserted into any of the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the head NH does not fall out and is locked, so that the head NH does not fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202 and stays on the cover portion 314. Will be done. That is, the elongated holes 316A to 316C cause the screw member N3 that has fallen onto the cover portion 314 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiting unit for limiting.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end and then linearly moved toward the rear, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage is formed. There is a high possibility that it will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 of the body 203. As shown in FIG. 30C, when the screw member N3 falls on the cover portion 324, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male screw portion NS intersects the concave grooves 326A to 326C, or the male screw portion NS or the like. Since a part of the head NH is housed in the concave grooves 326A to 326C, the head NH does not fall from the cover portion 324 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 but stays on the cover portion 324. That is, the concave grooves 326A to 326C cause the screw member N3 that has fallen onto the cover portion 324 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiting unit for limiting.

Further, when the vehicle falls on the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B of the second protruding portion 225 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, it is placed on the horizontal wall portion 264. It stays in a state of being inclined to. That is, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is arranged between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper end edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, so that the upper wall portion is arranged. Since the recess 290 that opens upward is formed by the 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B, and the horizontal wall portion 264, the recess 290 is accommodated and stays in the recess 290. That is, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and is a screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the fall of N3 to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the screw member N13 is separated forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the first passage forming body 203, and is slightly above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the attachment hole H13 formed in the attachment piece 263 which is the position. Therefore, if the screw member N13 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out rearward, it may fall into the recess 280 formed in the vicinity of the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. High (see FIG. 31 (A)). Specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is arranged between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper end edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, whereby the upper wall portion is arranged. Since a recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 opened upward by the 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264, the recess 280 is accommodated and stays in the recess 280. Become.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 (B), when the screw member N13 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out backward, it is arranged on the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264. It may fall and stay in the recess 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211. That is, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and is a screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the fall of N13 to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is mounted in the mounting hole H4. Therefore, if the screw member N4 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out backward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N4 will fall onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 (see FIG. 32).

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29, and 32, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves rearward so as to bend to the right, or linearly moves rearward. In any case of moving so as to turn to the right, as shown in FIG. 32, the board mounting frame 211 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 from above the upper wall portion 225A. The screw member N4 that has fallen from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and is accommodated and stays in the recess 242 formed by the board mounting frame 211 and the terminal board 210, or the board mounting frame. Although the male screw portion NS is inserted into the recess 243 formed between the 211 and the vertical wall portion 203B, the head NH may stay because it is locked without falling off. That is, the recess 242 and the recess 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the fall of the screw member N4 to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIG. 32, when the screw member N4 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation portions 233. Further, in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is fixed to the gaming island, since a plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connecting holes 231 are hung from the upper part of the gaming island (see FIG. 11), these cables C may prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. That is, the operation unit 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special limiting portion for limiting the falling of the screw member N4 that has been made to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, when the screw member N4 slips out of the mounting hole H4 and moves so as to bend to the right toward the rear and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body is opened at the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The first guide passage forming portion 202 from the uncovered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, which is not covered by any of the 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330. Fall into. The screw member N4 that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P, falls out from between the game balls, and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. It falls from any of the holes 271B to 271D formed at the position corresponding to the uncovered region 350 in the guide passage forming portion 202 and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, even if it does not fall from any of the holes 271B to 271D, it finally falls from any of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. That is, the holes 271A to 271H form a specific restriction portion for restricting the movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen to the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200.

On the other hand, when the screw member N4 slips out of the mounting hole H4 and moves so as to bend to the left toward the rear and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, it is placed on the recess 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By falling, the cover portion 334 does not fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202, but is accommodated in the recess 336 and stays there. That is, the recess 336 is for limiting the drop of the screw member N4 that has fallen on the cover portion 334 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Consists of a predetermined restriction part of.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the screw member N6 is formed in the substrate mounting frame 211 at a position forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is mounted in the mounting hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N6 will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 33).

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29 and 33, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided to move linearly toward the rear by a plurality of ribs 211A extending toward the rear. After that, when it moves so as to bend to the right side, as shown in FIG. 33, it falls to a position near the upstream side of the ball stopper 340 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. As described with reference to FIG. 24, the cover portion 334 covers the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to incline downward toward the downstream side (the payout device 200 side), so that the cover portion 334 is on the cover portion 334. The screw member N6 that has fallen to a position near the upstream side of the ball fixing member 340 in the above is likely to move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 34, the screw member N6 that has moved to the downstream side abuts on the ball stop member 340 provided at the downstream side end portion (left end portion) which is the inclined lower side of the cover portion 334, and abuts on the downstream side (downstream side (left end portion). By restricting the movement to the left side), it stays on the cover portion 334.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 34 (A) and 34 (B), when the ball stop member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B are opened. Since the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the wall portion having a substantially U-shape in a plan view composed of the left wall portion 341C, the screw member N6 is held without dropping from the cover portion 334. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 34 (C) and 34 (D), when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state, the protrusion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage, so that the screw member N6 is placed on the protrusion. Since it can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without dropping from the cover portion 334.

In the second state, the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may fall backward or forward because the front and rear sides are open only when the protrusion 341D is arranged so as to intersect the inclined direction. On the other hand, in the first state, since the front and rear left sides of the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted are covered by the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C, the movement of the screw member N6 is restricted. It can be more reliably retained than in the second state where the left wall portion 341C is located only on the left side. That is, the ball stopper 340 is provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the tilt direction of the cover portion 334, and constitutes a specific portion capable of retaining the screw member N6 that has fallen on the cover portion 334 in the cover portion 334. are doing.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the screw member N5 is separated from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the front right side in the mounting member 223, and is located above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Although it is attached to the formed mounting hole H5, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not arranged directly behind the mounting hole H5, and the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is also cut in the middle. Since the screw member N5 has been scratched, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backward, it falls on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion 225, but before reaching the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a high possibility that the upper wall portion 225A will fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the screw member N16 is attached to the mounting hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and below the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N5 will fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. ..

(Action / effect)
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, a screw member provided at a position above the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3. N3 to N6, etc. fall off due to loosening caused by vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and move backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibration or impact or opening / closing of the gaming machine frame 3, and then cover. When falling onto the portions 314, 324, 334, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the concave grooves 326A to 326C, the concave portions 336 and the ball stopper member 340 restrict the falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Since there is a high possibility that the cover portion 314, 324, 334 will stay on the cover portion 314, 324, 334 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It is possible to prevent the member from moving and being mixed in the payout device 200. Further, since the vertical wall portion is formed at the left (downstream side) end of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves to the left side, it enters the first guide passage forming portion 202. Can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36, on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the region excluding the uncovered region 350 is covered by the cover portions 314, 324 and 334, but the ball tank forming portion 201 is covered. Even if the replenished game ball spills and gets on the cover part 314, 324 on the upstream side, the front and rear dimensions of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the concave groove 326A to 326C are from the diameter 2R of the game ball P. The game ball P rolls to the left side and then falls from the left end portion of the cover portion 324 to the uncovered region 350 and is returned to the inside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Therefore, not only can the game ball that has been placed on the cover portions 314 and 324 be returned to the inside of the first guide passage forming portion 202, but also the game ball P stays in the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the dropped screw member N stays is limited, or the falling screw member N comes into contact with the staying game ball and falls from the uncovered region 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It can be prevented.

When the game ball falls on the cover portion 334, it flows down on the cover portion 334 toward the left side and the flow is restricted by the ball stop member 340, or it falls out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. do.

Further, in the elongated holes 316A to 316C as the first retaining portion and the concave grooves 326A to 326C as the second retaining portion, the concave groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the elongated holes 316A to 316C. The front-rear dimension L22B is larger than the front-rear dimension L22 of the elongated hole 316B (L22B> L21). By doing so, the screw member tends to stay in the retention portion as it approaches the payout device 200, so that the screw member that has fallen on the cover portions 314 and 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Can be prevented from doing so.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and stayed on the cover portions 314, 324 and 334 move due to vibration, impact, or the like, and are uncovered between the cover portion 324 and the cover portion 334. When falling from the region 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A like the screw member N4, the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the uncovered region 350. Even if it falls directly inward, it falls out of the space between the game balls and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A while moving toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P in the first guide passage forming portion 202. As a result, the screw member falls from any of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member dropped into the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves to the payout device 200. It is possible to suppress mixing.

Further, the plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the middle flow portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion in the first guide passage forming portion 202, and are formed in the ball tank forming portion 201. There is a region where no hole is formed between the holes 270A and 270B formed at close positions and the hole 271A on the most upstream side of the holes 271A to 271H. As described above, since a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed is formed in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming portion 201 flow down in a state of being stacked vertically. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A near the upstream portion in the first guide passage forming portion 202 to which the ball pressure is applied.

Further, by forming the region in which the hole is not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in this way, the screw member dropped from the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed in the rear wall portion of the cover body 220. It is possible to appropriately suppress the entry into the inside of the cover body 220 from the heat radiation hole 220B (see FIG. 14) or the like.

Further, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the regions where the holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202. Can be suppressed from falling, and the screw member that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is prevented from being mixed into the payout device 200 without falling to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. be able to.

Further, since the largest hole 271H among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, the screw member can be preferably removed from the hole 271H outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, when a screw member falls from the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the game ball is formed in the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350. The screw member is often located at the upper part of the game ball because the screws are stacked vertically, but the hole 271H is arranged on the downstream side of the straightening vane 338 of the cover portion 334, that is, Since the game ball is arranged at a position where it is rectified in one upper and lower stage, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the dispensing device 200.

Further, since at least a part of the hole portions 271B to 271D among the plurality of hole portions 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is not covered. Even if it is mixed from the region 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be dropped from the holes 271B to 271D to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, at least some of the holes 271E to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided on the payout device 200 side of the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, as described above. Even if the game ball that has fallen from the uncovered area 350 to the first guide passage forming portion 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it approaches downward while moving along with the flow of the game ball and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Since the probability of this is high, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30 (C), 31 (A), (B), and 32, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 are referred to the first guide passage forming portion. The recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 as special retaining portions that can be retained before reaching 202 are below the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the mounting holes H3 to H6 as the attached portions. The screw members N3 to N6 provided in the cover portion H3 to H6 but did not stay in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242 and 243 can be moved toward the cover portions 314, 324 and 334. It is possible to prevent the screw members N3 to N6 detached from the mounting holes H3 to H6 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, since the depths of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 are the depths at which a part of the screw members N3 to N6 protrudes in the state where the screw members N3 to N6 are accommodated, the recesses 280, 290, The screw members N3 to N6 accumulated in 214, 242 and 243 can be easily taken out.

Further, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and the recesses 336 restrict the falling screw members from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Not only (or obstructing), but also because it is a retention portion that can be retained outside the first guide passage forming portion 202, a clerk at a game hall or the like finds a screw member when performing an inspection or the like. Since it becomes possible to identify which screw member has come off, it becomes easy to take measures against the mixing of the screw member into the dispensing device 200.

Further, in the ball stopping member 340 as the specific portion, the rotating portion 341 is located in the upright position, the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344, and the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is guided to the second guide. The first state that allows the passage to flow down to the passage forming portion 204, the rotating portion 341 is located at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 It is possible to change to the second state in which the game ball cannot flow down (or is difficult to flow down) to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the first state is when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state. Since the screw member is more likely to stay than in the above case, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed in the payout device 200.

More specifically, as described above, the ball stop member 340 is set to the second state when the game balls in the first guide passage and the second guide passage are taken out, that is, the clerk of the game hall or the like is a pachinko gaming machine. While the inspection and maintenance work of 1 is performed, the ball stop member 340 is set to the first state when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the operating state, that is, when the clerk of the game hall cannot monitor. Therefore, it is possible to suitably prevent the screw member from being mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

Further, the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of places by screw members N11 to N14 having a flange portion F as a locking portion, and the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 are attached. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the above to the gaming machine frame 3 fall out of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 even if they are separated from the gaming machine frame 3, so that the first guiding passage forming portion 202 and the ball It is attached at a position below the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201. Therefore, since the screw members N11 to N14 to which the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the gaming ball, they are hard to come off from the gaming machine frame 3 as a threaded member with a flange, while the ball tank forming portion 201 and the ball tank forming portion 201 and Even if the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the first guide passage forming portion 202 fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member dropped into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is a payout device 200. It is possible to prevent the mixture from being mixed in.

Further, among a plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the gaming machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member (for example, the screw member N12) near the peripheral edge portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 ) Is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the screw member (number of parts) can be reduced, so that the screw member has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It is possible to prevent the screw member from being mixed into the payout device 200. Instead of the ground wire, it may also be used as a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the gaming machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming portion is formed. Since the 201 can be firmly attached and vibration is less likely to occur, loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

Further, the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the upper position of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3 are screw members having no flange portion F and having a small diameter of the head NH. Even if the screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be easily dropped from the holes 271A to 271H, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member from being mixed in the dispensing device 200.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 35, a screw member that has fallen is rearwardly placed in a region below the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the game board 2 that can be attached to and detached from the gaming machine frame 3. Alternatively, the cover body 220 is provided with an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down to the payout device 200 side with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202. It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the upper wall portion 220H from bouncing and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Further, although not particularly shown, the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward from the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and fall onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220. By guiding the screw member to flow backward or toward the payout device 200 side, the screw member that has fallen on the upper wall portion 220H is prevented from falling into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, 91A arranged below. Can be prevented.

Further, the cover body 220 is generated from these drive sources by being provided so as to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the effect device having a movable body, and the effect control board 12. Although a plurality of heat radiating holes 220B for releasing heat are formed on the upper part of the rear wall portion (see FIG. 14), these heat radiating holes 220B have at least the head even if the male screw portion NS of the screw member can be inserted. It is preferable that the size is such that NH cannot be inserted. Further, since there is a high possibility that the screw member will fall from the upper holes 270A, 270B, 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H arranged directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiation hole 220B is used. It is preferable to form at least in the upper wall portion 220H at a position not corresponding to the holes 270A, 270B, 271A to 271H, or to form in a portion other than the upper wall portion 220H (for example, a rear wall portion). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and adversely affecting the image display device 5, the effect device having a movable body, the effect control board 12, and the like.

(Modification 1)
Next, a modification 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 37. 37A and 37B are a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modified example, and FIG. 37 is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion.

In the above embodiment, the guide passage forming portion forming the guide passage for guiding the game ball of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 is extended so as to be inclined downward toward the left side. A guide passage forming portion 202 and a second guide passage forming portion 204 extending downward from the lower left end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG. 24, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface thereof is provided so that the ball stopper 340 projects upward on the upper surface of the left end portion. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, although the embodiment in which the screw member N moving on the cover portion 334 to the left side is received and can stay is illustrated. Like 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the lower second guide passage forming portion 204.

By doing so, when the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen on the cover portion 360 move toward the left end portion side, they do not stay on the cover portion 360 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. Since the screw member N falls directly to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the left end portion of the screw member N, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), in the case where the concave portion 361 capable of retaining the screw member N is formed on the upper surface of the cover portion 360, the concave portion 361 in the cover portion 360 is located near the concave portion 361. 1 The cable CH may be provided so as to intersect the flow direction of the game ball in the guide passage forming portion 202.

By doing so, the screw member N and the game ball P that have accumulated in the recess 361 but may move due to the inclination can be retained by restricting the movement by the cable C.

(Explanation of deformation and application)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, as the screw members, the screw members N1 to 6, N11 to 16 for mounting the mounting member 223, the first passage forming body 203, and the like to the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the pachinko machine. Screw members (not shown) attached to other parts of the gaming machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the skeletons constituting the gaming island, and various devices arranged inside the gaming island (for example). , Replenishment device 150, etc.), etc.) have been exemplified as a form for a screw member (not shown) for attaching to a skeleton, etc. All threaded members such as threaded members that have remained in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for some reason, such as forgetting to install them during on-site maintenance, can be targeted, but at least they are pre-installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is preferable that the screw member can be prevented from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a storage portion capable of storing the game medium, a mode in which a box-shaped ball tank forming portion 201 whose upper surface is opened by the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion B is applied is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the storage unit can store the game ball, the front-rear dimension is larger than the front-rear dimension of the first guide passage forming portion 202 like the ball tank forming portion 201. It does not have to be long, and may have substantially the same or shorter front-rear dimensions as those of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Further, the upper surface does not necessarily have to be open as long as it can receive the game ball supplied from the replenishment device 150.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a payout device 200 capable of paying out a game ball by a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit capable of paying out a game medium has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. It may be a payout device capable of paying out a game ball by a member other than a sprocket.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper surface is opened, and the upper surface is opened by the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B as a guide passage forming portion for forming a guide passage for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the discharge portion. An example is an example in which the first guide passage forming portion 202 formed in a groove shape is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the guidance is composed of a tubular member having an opening formed in a part of the upper surface. It may be a passage forming portion, and its shape, size, and the like can be variously changed. The width dimension (front-back dimension) may be substantially the same as or larger than that of the ball tank forming portion 201, and the game balls may be guided in a plurality of rows so as to be able to flow down.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion capable of storing the game ball and a first guide passage having an open upper surface and guiding the game ball of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the embodiment in which the first guide passage forming portion 202 to be formed is integrally molded is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 are separately formed. The members may be integrally formed by assembling the members with a screw member or the like. In this case, the screw member for assembling the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is also the target of the screw member of the present invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the screw member can be mixed from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not limited to this. A screw member may be mixed from a hole, a notch, or the like formed on the standing wall side of the wall. Further, when the screw member can be mixed in the second guide passage forming portion 204, the predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member to the second guide passage forming portion 204 or the second guide passage forming portion 204 A specific restriction unit or the like for restricting the movement of the dropped screw member to the dispensing device 200 may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover portion provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire region of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be covered with the cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover portion covering a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be composed of a member separate from the first guide passage forming portion 202. It may be integrally formed with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. That is, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance in a square cylinder shape.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member stays on the cover portion as a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member dropped on the cover portion 314, 324, 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Examples of the embodiment in which the elongated holes 316A to 316C as the holes that can be made to be formed and the concave grooves 326A to 326C and the concave portions 336 as the concave portions are applied, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the screw member is not limited to this. Drop control part (fall inhibition part) that can regulate (or obstruct) the fall from the cover part, and movement regulation part (movement obstruction part) that can regulate (or obstruct) the movement of the screw member on the cover part. Alternatively, it may be a drop guiding portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member from above the cover portion to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to be able to fall. As a means capable of restricting or hindering the drop or movement, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering the screw member, and the like may be used.

That is, the predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member that has fallen on the cover portions 314, 324, 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is the falling of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Anything that can make it difficult to fall, as well as something that makes it impossible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of specific restriction units are provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202 and for restricting the movement of the screw member dropped on the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200. Although the embodiment in which the holes 271A to 271H are applied is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the screw member dropped on the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200 side is restricted ( Alternatively, it may be a movement control unit (movement inhibition unit) capable of (inhibition). As a means capable of restricting or hindering the movement to the payout device 200 side, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of adsorbing a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering the screw member, and the like. These may be provided at positions that do not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, a corner portion between the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B, which is not in contact with the game ball).

That is, the specific restriction unit provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202 and for restricting the movement of the screw member dropped on the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200 is the screw member payout device 200. If the movement to the side can be restricted, not only the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 cannot be moved to the discharge device 200 side, but also the movement can be made difficult. Anything is fine.

Further, when the movement of the screw member dropped on the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (regulated, obstructed) by the specific limiting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the movement is restricted. There is a high possibility that the ball is clogged because the threaded member that is restricted and stays in the first guide passage also restricts the flow of the game ball. When the ball is clogged, the replenishment error notification is executed as described above, so that the clerk of the game hall opens the frame 3 for the game machine to form the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage on the back surface. There is a high possibility that the condition of the game ball in the unit 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member does not move to the payout device 200 but stays in the first guide passage forming portion 202, it becomes easy for the store clerk or the like to identify that the cause of the ball clogging was the screw member. Appropriate measures can be taken.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the plurality of holes 271A to 271H all have a size capable of dropping the screw member is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A are not limited thereto. As long as at least two or more holes of the 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes need not be able to drop the screw member. Further, the shapes and sizes of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary and can be variously changed without being limited to the above-mentioned form.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12 are applied as the first substrate to be mounted below the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the present invention is limited thereto. Other boards such as a relay board may also be targeted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the terminal substrate 210 is applied as the second substrate mounted at a position above the first guide passage forming portion 202 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As the second substrate, other substrates such as a relay substrate may also be targeted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 as the first board and the effect control board 12 exemplify a form in which the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are housed are attached to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various substrates as the first substrate may be directly attached to the gaming board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3 without going through the substrate case.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12 as the first substrate, the substrate cases 11A and 12A in which the respective substrates are housed are the screw members N20 and N21, that is, the screw members are used. The terminal board 210 as the second board, which is mounted on the game board 2 by the mounting method, uses a locking means including a plurality of regulating portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw member, that is, Although the embodiment of mounting to the board mounting frame 211 by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and a locking means using a latch member or the like, a caulking pin or the like is used. It may include an attachment means, an adhesive means such as an adhesive, and the like.

Further, in the above embodiment, the screw member provided around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and moving toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 is restricted from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202. As a special restriction portion for this, the embodiment in which the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242 and 243 are applied is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 of the screw member is provided. A drop control section (fall blocker) that can regulate (or hinder) the fall of the screw member, or a movement control section (movement blocker) that can regulate (or block) the movement of the screw member to the first guide passage forming section 202. , It may be a drop guidance portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to be able to fall. As a means capable of restricting or hindering the fall or movement of the first guide passage forming portion 202, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member and a screw member can be adhered. It may be an adhesive portion or the like.

That is, the special restriction portion for restricting the fall of the detached screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not only the one that prevents the screw member from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202, but also the one that makes it impossible to fall. Anything that can make it difficult to fall will do. For example, a convex portion as a fall restricting portion (fall obstruction portion), a concave portion or a hole portion as a movement restricting portion (movement obstructing portion), or the like may be provided at a predetermined position such as the upper wall portion 225A.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion 202 provided with the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 and the like as the special limiting portion is located near the standing wall portion 203B on the front side. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least between the mounted portion (mounting hole) to which the screw member is mounted and the guide passage forming portion, the present invention is not necessarily provided at a position in the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 203B. For example, it may be provided at a position closer to the attached portion than the guide passage forming portion between the attached portion and the guide passage forming portion of the screw member.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first is a specific portion capable of retaining the screw member N6 dropped on the cover portion 334 on the payout device 200 side in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334 in the cover portion 334. The present invention exemplifies a form in which a ball-stopping member 340 that can be changed into a first state that allows the game ball of the guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down and a second state that makes it difficult or impossible to flow down is applied. Not limited to this, if the member is provided on the payout device 200 side (inclination lower side) in the tilt direction in the cover portion 334, the movement of the screw member is restricted even if it does not have the ball fixing function. It may be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, a wiring retainer, or the like that can be (or obstructed).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball-stopping member 340 as a specific portion is provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the inclined direction in the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, the specific portion may be provided at the end portion of the cover portion 314, 324 on the payout device 200 side as long as it is provided at the end portion of the cover portion on the payout device 200 side.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the ball-stopping member 340 as a specific portion is composed of a member separate from the cover portion 334 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. A specific portion (ball stop portion) may be integrally formed on a part of the members constituting the cover portion 334.

Further, in the above embodiment, as an example of the locking portion, the flange portion F (washer) having a larger diameter than the head NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head NH. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the flange portion F, a washer or the like that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member may be used, or the head may be used. It also includes a detent portion of the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive, and the like. Further, the screw member is not limited to a member that can be attached by a tool such as a screwdriver, but may be a thumbscrew, and includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that is detached from the attached portion when loosened.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion is attached to the game machine frame 3 at a plurality of places by screw members N11 to N14 having a flange portion F as a locking portion to form a ball tank. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3 fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 even if they are separated from the game machine frame 3. , A mode in which the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the ball tank forming portion 201 are attached at a position lower than the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first Even if the position is above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the guide passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201, for example, the position is laterally displaced from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201. If it is attached to a non-directly above position, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling directly onto the first guide passage forming portion 202. Further, the dropped screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guiding portion (for example, a concave groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A) or the like. May be good.

Further, the predetermined limiting portion, the specific limiting portion, the special limiting portion, and the specific portion in the above embodiment are not only the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but also pachinko games such as a gaming island. Although the embodiment in which the movement of the screw member other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 is restricted or restricted (inhibited) is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and is attached to at least the pachinko gaming machine 1. Restriction or restriction of movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and the screw members N3 to N6 mounted above the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200. (Inhibition) It is preferable that it is formed in a possible size and morphology.

(Characteristic part 053SG)
Next, a mode for carrying out the gaming machine in the feature unit 053SG according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 38-1 to 38-24.

The gaming machine in the feature unit 053SG is a pachinko gaming machine installed in a game hall or the like, a slot machine, or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. 38-1, a gaming control microcomputer for controlling the game is mounted. It is equipped with a game control board. As the game machine described below, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment can be applied, the main board 11 of the above embodiment can be applied to the game control board, and the effect control board 12 can be applied to the effect control board. Is.

As shown in FIG. 38-1, a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors for detecting the input status according to the progress of the game are connected to the game control board. The input parts include, for example, a detection switch for detecting an operation by a player, a detection switch for detecting the passage of a game medium such as a game ball or a medal, a sensor for specifying the position of a movable object used for a game such as a reel, and a player. It is a detection switch used for various settings such as the advantage of the reel, and a detection switch for detecting the opening of a door or an abnormality.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38-1, the game control board is equipped with an input circuit for detecting input signals from these input components, and the detection status of the input signal from the input components by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and is used for game control by the game control microcomputer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38-1, a plurality of output components such as a display, an LED, a motor, a solenoid, and the like that perform output control according to the progress of the game are connected to the game control board. The output parts are, for example, a display that displays according to the lottery result, a display that displays the progress of the game and the state of the game machine, a display that instructs the player in the operation mode, and a value owned by the player. A display that displays the game status, an LED that indicates the game status, an LED that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality, a motor that operates a moving part used for a game such as a reel or a variable winning device, a solenoid, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38-1, the game control board is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The game control microcomputer controls output components according to the progress of the game by transmitting output data to the output circuit.

Further, the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit are connected via a data bus, and the input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and the game control microcomputer is connected to the output circuit. The output data of is transmitted via a shared data bus.

Also, not all input circuits are connected via a shared data bus, but some input circuits are directly connected to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus, and the shared data bus is used. The input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through.

All of the output circuits are configured to be connected via a shared data bus, but some output circuits are directly connected to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus and are shared. The output data may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without going through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to the external output terminal, and the output data from the game control microcomputer is output to the external device as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance of the gaming machine using the output data output as.

Next, the game control board included in the game machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the following Examples 1 to 3.

The structure of the game control board in the first embodiment will be described. The game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, electronic components are not mounted on the other surface, and terminals provided by the electronic components are soldered. In the following, electronic components are mounted. The surface is called a mounting surface, and the surface on which electronic components are not mounted and the terminals of the electronic components are soldered is called a soldering surface.

FIG. 38-2 is a diagram showing a mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 38-3 is a diagram showing a solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 38-2 and 38-3, the game control board is a rectangular printed circuit board composed of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating property. Consists of. Further, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes penetrating the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board are composed of conductors so as to appropriately connect the through holes. A plurality of soldering patterns are formed. Further, in the region where the wiring pattern of the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board is not formed, an insulating region made of an insulator and a conductor are formed, and a ground region forming a ground is formed. The ground region is a betta land formed over almost the entire area other than the region where the wiring pattern and the insulating region are formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board.

As shown in FIG. 38-2, the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction is arranged more than the ratio of the wiring pattern extending in the horizontal direction on the mounting surface, while the solder surface is arranged as shown in FIG. 38-3. There are more wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction than the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction is aggregated on the mounting surface, and the wiring pattern extending in the horizontal direction is aggregated on the solder surface, and when the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction and the wiring pattern extending in the horizontal direction intersect. Designs such as bypassing wiring patterns can be reduced as much as possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38-3, since many wiring patterns arranged on the solder surface extend in the same lateral direction as the long side, the distance of the wiring pattern is longer than that of the wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, the electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern with a relatively long distance arranged on the soldering surface is obstructed by the electronic components. Is avoided.

Further, when the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface is branched, one of the wiring patterns of the branch destination is formed on the solder surface and the other is formed on the mounting surface through the through hole. Branching is performed without bypassing one wiring pattern or crossing one wiring pattern and the other wiring pattern at the branch destination on the same surface.

FIG. 38-4 is a diagram showing a mounting surface in a state where the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 38-4, electronic components such as the above-mentioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components in which a terminal row consisting of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction has one row or a plurality of rows. Most of the electronic components including these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, arranged in the horizontal direction. As described above, on the mounting surface, the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction is large, and the electronic components provided with the terminal rows are often arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, arranged in the horizontal direction. By doing so, it is possible to connect to a terminal row arranged in the horizontal direction as it is without changing the direction of the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction.

Further, among the electronic components provided with the terminal train, the input circuit and the output circuit are formed in a rectangular shape as shown in FIG. 38-4, have a concave notch on one of the short sides, and have a concave notch on the surface. The model number is printed, and the orientation of the component can be specified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. Then, as shown in FIG. 38-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side and the printing direction of the model number is from left to right in FIG. 38-4, while the output circuit is arranged. , In Fig. 38-4, the notch is arranged to the right and the printing direction of the model number is from right to left, and these electronic components are arranged in the input circuit depending on the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. It is possible to specify whether it is an output circuit or not.

FIG. 38-5 is a diagram showing the configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 38-6 is a diagram from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the branched wiring pattern.

As described above, the game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. .. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns formed on the solder surface extending in the lateral direction, and as shown in FIGS. 38-5, the game control board of the game control board. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from the through hole to which the terminal of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side is connected. As shown in FIG. 38-6, the data bus and the electronic components such as the input circuit and the output circuit are branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole, and the wiring pattern is formed so as to extend in the vertical direction. Connected by.

When connecting a game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits separated in the lateral direction via a data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the lateral direction. It is connected to the data bus of the surface, branches to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending in the vertical direction toward the electronic component through the through hole at the position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the electronic components separated in the lateral direction. Further, since the wiring pattern constituting the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which the electronic components are not mounted, it is not easily affected by the noise from the electronic components on the data bus, and the data bus and the electronic components are through. Since they are connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the hole, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened, and the influence of noise from electronic components during this period is not easily affected.

As shown in FIG. 38-5, the wiring pattern extending in the lateral direction constituting the data bus is not formed in a straight line, but is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns extending in the lateral direction. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is the antenna whose resonance is maximized according to the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed shorter than the length (λ (bus clock) / 2). Therefore, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus has an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, and it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length is halved of the antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, strong resonance may occur due to reflection on the surface of the substrate, so the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) are formed to have a length that is not half of the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock, and strong resonance occurs due to reflection on the surface of the substrate. It is also prevented from emitting radio waves.

The bus clock differs depending on the game control microcomputer and the oscillator to be mounted, but the length (L1 to L8) of each divided wiring pattern depends on the bus clock which is the maximum frequency expected. It is formed so as to be shorter than the antenna length at which the resonance is maximum, and not half the antenna length at which the resonance is maximum according to the bus clock at the maximum frequency. Therefore, even when data is transmitted with a bus clock having a bus clock lower than the expected maximum frequency, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being generated.

As shown in FIG. 38-5, the plurality of lateral wiring patterns constituting the data bus are diagonally right or diagonally left, that is, the direction of the plurality of lateral wiring patterns. They are connected across a wiring pattern that extends in different directions. Further, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction divided into a plurality of parts and the wiring pattern in the diagonally right direction or the diagonally left direction are bent at an obtuse angle and connected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38-5, it is mounted through a through hole (A to F shown in FIGS. 38-5) provided on the diagonal wiring pattern connecting the plurality of lateral wiring patterns. It is designed to branch into a wiring pattern on the surface side (wiring pattern connected to A to F shown in FIGS. 38-6), and is a diagonal wiring pattern connecting a plurality of horizontal wiring patterns divided into each other. The wiring patterns that make up the data bus are branched using.

In the game control board according to the first embodiment, in order to make the length of the horizontal wiring pattern shorter than the antenna length at which the resonance is maximized, the horizontal wiring pattern is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns and a plurality of wiring patterns. The horizontal wiring patterns divided into two are connected by the diagonal wiring patterns formed on the same solder surface, but the horizontal wiring patterns divided into a plurality of are formed on the mounting surface side. As a configuration in which the wiring pattern is connected by the wiring pattern, that is, the wiring pattern in the lateral direction is alternately formed on the solder surface and the mounting surface so that the length of the wiring pattern in the lateral direction is shorter than the antenna length at which the resonance is maximized. Is also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch at a point where the horizontal wiring pattern switches from the solder surface or the mounting surface to the other surface, and such a configuration bypasses the wiring pattern after branching. , It is possible to branch the wiring pattern constituting the data bus without intersecting on the same surface.

FIG. 38-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground region formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 38-8 is a diagram formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area.

As shown in FIGS. 38-7 and 38-8, a ground region is formed over almost the entire area other than the region where the wiring pattern and the insulating region are formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board. The ground region formed on the game control board is composed of a first ground region and a second ground region electrically separated by an insulating region. On both the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground region is formed in the region on the left side of the game control board, and the second ground region is formed in the region on the right side of the game control board.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38-7, wiring patterns for transmitting low voltage (Vcc (+ 5V) in this embodiment) signals such as a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, and an output circuit are connected. The electronic component (low voltage component) is mounted in the left region where the first ground region is formed, and the ground terminal of the low voltage component is connected to the first ground region. On the other hand, electronic components (high voltage components) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high voltage (VLD (+ 24V) in this embodiment) signals, such as drive circuits for operating motors and solenoids, are connected are the first. It is mounted in the area on the right side where the two ground areas are formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended current from flowing back from the high voltage component to the low voltage component through the ground region. Further, since the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs, they are prevented from interfering with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38-9, since a capacitor is provided between the first ground region and the second ground region, the capacitor is used between the first ground region and the second ground region. Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, it is possible to prevent current from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38-7 and 38-8, an insulating region in which a wiring pattern is not formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the first The ground region and the second ground region are electrically separated from each other. Further, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed so as to overlap each other, and the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on the mounting surface. Since the insulating region that separates the ground region and the insulating region that separates the first ground region and the second ground region on the solder surface are also formed so as to overlap each other, one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface is formed with respect to the other surface. Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, it is prevented from interfering with each other.

FIG. 38-10 is a diagram showing a configuration of a connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 38-11 is a diagram showing a connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern of the periphery, and FIG. 38-12 is a figure which shows the state which the game control board in this Example is housed in a board case.

As shown in FIGS. 38-10, a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 for connecting wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the game control board near the lower side of the mounting surface. In the wiring from the game control board, the signal that triggers the lottery, the signal for shifting the set value that defines the advantage for the player such as the lottery probability to the changeable state, and the setting value for changing the set value. Wiring that inputs or outputs signals related to the advantage of the game, such as signals and signals that display information that is advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring that inputs the detection signal of the error cancellation operation, backup power supply Wiring as a supply line is included.

As shown in FIGS. 38-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and is not directly connected to FIG. 38. As shown in -11, it is connected to a wiring pattern formed on a solder surface, that is, a surface opposite to the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 38-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connector such as the connector number is printed around the wiring pattern. ing. The information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, and may be configured to print information on the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 38-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder surface is the wiring on the mounting surface through the through hole at the end on the side opposite to the side connected to the terminal. Connected to the pattern. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in FIGS. 38-10 and 38-11 are through holes to which the terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 It is provided at the place where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern from the solder surface to the mounting surface by using the through hole for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 38-12 (A) and 38-12 (B), the game control board is attached to the game machine in a state of being housed in the board case. The substrate case can be sealed by a one-way screw, a sealing seal, welding, or the like, and once sealed, it is difficult to open it without leaving a trace. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the game machine in a state of being housed in the board case, the structure is such that fraud against the game control board is prevented.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38-12 (A) and 38-12 (B), the substrate case is provided with a covering portion that covers the region around the connectors CN1 to CN7 in a state where the game control substrate is housed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the region of the mounting surface of the game control board that is covered by the covering portion of the substrate case, and the wiring pattern is formed avoiding the region. There is. The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes so that wiring from the outside can be connected.

Even when the game control board is housed in the board case in this way, since the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring from the outside, a slight gap is generated around the connectors CN1 to CN7, but the connectors CN1 to CN7 The terminals provided in the above are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and the solder surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite surface, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of connectors CN1 to CN7 can be short-circuited from around the part where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case. It is designed to prevent fraudulent activities such as disconnection.

Further, the periphery of the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered by the covering portion of the substrate case, and the area covered by the covering portion is the wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. None of the wiring patterns including the pattern is formed, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface in the area other than the covering portion. The wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is surely prevented from being short-circuited or broken from the periphery of the portion where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case.

FIG. 38-13 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 38-13, Vcc (+ 5V) is generated on the power supply board and is connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. Further, Vcc (+ 5V) is branched from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer in the power supply board and connected to the charging capacitor via the backflow prevention diode, and the backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor are connected. The line branched between them is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While the electric power is being supplied, Vcc (+ 5V) is supplied as a power source for driving the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+ 5V) is stopped, so that the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer. By receiving the supply of the backup power supply VBB, the game control microcomputer holds the data stored in the RAM included in the game control microcomputer. In this embodiment, the backup power supply is supplied from the power supply board outside the game control board, but it may be supplied from the circuit provided in the game control board.

38-14 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIGS. 38-15 are formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the wiring pattern which was made, and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface.

As shown in FIGS. 38-14, on the solder surface of the game control board, wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power and wiring patterns VBB for supplying backup power are used as wiring patterns constituting the power supply line. , Are formed. As shown in FIGS. 38-14 and 38-15, the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 33 are composed of a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB is composed of only the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, as shown in FIGS. 38-14. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer only through the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is supplied is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to bypass the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so that noise from the outside is generated. It is less susceptible to damage and prevents the data stored in the RAM from being damaged by noise.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38-15, a beta land is formed on the mounting surface where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, the noise is blocked by the beta land formed on the mounting surface, so that the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side is less affected by the noise. Further, as shown in FIGS. 38-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB that supplies backup power is on the mounting surface side rather than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to Vcc1 to 3 that supply normal power. In the corresponding region of the above, it is formed at a position where the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, particularly the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is less likely to intersect. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied from the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side is suppressed as much as possible.

In this embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB that supplies backup power is the corresponding area on the mounting surface side than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 that supply normal power. In the configuration, the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for transmission. However, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the signal that triggers the lottery. The wiring pattern in which signals related to the interests of the player are transmitted, such as, is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring pattern in which signals not directly related to the player's history, such as signals for controlling output components, are transmitted. It is used for the transmission of the signal formed on the mounting surface side by being formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding region. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern in which the signal related to the interest of the player from the wiring pattern is transmitted is suppressed as much as possible.

Further, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern in which the reset signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and the wiring pattern in which the operation clock is given to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. Where the wiring pattern in which the signal is transmitted intersects with the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding region on the mounting surface side, rather than the wiring pattern in which other signals are transmitted. By making the configuration formed at a position where the number of signals is reduced, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern in which a relatively important signal is transmitted from the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side is as much as possible. It can be suppressed.

FIG. 38-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the slot machine. The slot machine is equipped with game-related game parts such as a liquid crystal display, an effect control board for controlling the effect, a reel unit composed of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit for paying out medals. When the game control board is attached to the slot machine, the surface of the game control board on the mounting surface side, that is, the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed, is on the game component side. Installed to be placed. With such a configuration, the influence of noise generated from the game component on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 38-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which a game control board is attached to a pachinko gaming machine. When the pachinko gaming machine is installed in the game hall, it is often installed so that the back surfaces of the pachinko gaming machines face each other with other gaming devices such as other pachinko gaming machines. When the game control board is attached to the pachinko gaming machine, the surface of the game control board on the mounting surface side, that is, the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed, is another game. It is installed so that it is placed on the device side. With such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other gaming devices on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

(Action effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a ratio of wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The ratio of the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (left-right direction) different from the one direction is larger than the ratio of the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (left-right direction), and the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface has the ratio of the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (left-right direction) in the first direction (up and down). It is characterized by having more wiring patterns extending in the direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (vertical direction) is aggregated on the mounting surface, and the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) is aggregated on the solder surface, so that the wiring pattern extends in the first direction. When the wiring pattern extending in the (vertical direction) and the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (left-right direction) intersect, the design such as bypassing the wiring pattern can be reduced as much as possible.

The game control board of this embodiment is a square composed of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed without waste along the shape of the game control board.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that electronic components including a terminal row composed of a plurality of terminals are arranged so that the terminal rows are arranged in a second direction (left-right direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (left-right direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment has a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (left and right direction). It has a rectangular shape consisting of, and is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and electronic components are not mounted on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to form a wiring pattern in the second direction (left-right direction) in which the distance can be long on the solder surface without being hindered by the electronic components.

The game control board of the present embodiment includes a wiring pattern in which the wiring pattern branches from one wiring pattern to two wiring patterns, and one of the two wiring patterns of the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface. The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to bypass one wiring pattern of the branch destination or to intersect one wiring pattern of the branch destination and the other wiring pattern on the same surface, and the wiring pattern can be preferably used. Can be formed.

(Action effect 2)
The game control board of this embodiment connects a first terminal (terminal of a game control microcomputer) and a second terminal (terminals of an input circuit and an output circuit) separated from each other in a specific direction (left-right direction), and a specific signal (terminal of an input circuit and an output circuit) is connected. A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmission of input data and output data is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction). A specific length (λ / 2) in which the wiring pattern of a straight line that is divided and formed and extends in a specific direction (left-right direction) is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than. According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed by being divided into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction), and a straight line extending in a specific direction (left-right direction). The wiring pattern is formed shorter than the specific length (λ / 2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed. ) Can be prevented from becoming an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data), and unintended radio waves can be prevented from being emitted.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction different from the specific direction (horizontal direction) (diagonal direction). .. According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) with a simple structure.

The game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (left-right direction). However, a wiring pattern may be formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) may be alternately formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Even in such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) and another wiring pattern. It is characterized by branching to. According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be suitably branched by utilizing between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction and another wiring pattern.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the linear wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized in that it is formed shorter than a specific length (λ / 2). According to such a configuration, the length of the linear wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (left-right direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data), and therefore is equal to or less than the maximum frequency. It is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted even if a signal is transmitted.

The game control board of the present embodiment has a specific length (λ / 2) in which the linear wiring pattern extending in a specific direction is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by having a length that does not become 1/2 (λ / 4). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern of a straight line extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) becomes 1/2 of the specific length (λ / 2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the substrate. Since there is no such thing, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

(Action effect 3)
The game control board of this embodiment has a first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern to which a signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+ 5V)) is transmitted is connected, and a second voltage (VDL (+ 24V)). The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal is transmitted is connected, and the first electronic component (low voltage component) is connected to the first ground region, and the second electronic component (second electronic component) The high voltage component) is characterized in that it is connected to a first ground region and a second ground region separated by an insulating portion. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+ 5V)) is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground region and the second voltage. The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the (VDL (+ 24V)) signal is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground region and the second ground region separated by the insulating portion (insulating region). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended current from flowing back through the ground.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+ 5V)) is transmitted is connected to the first ground region. The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal of the second voltage (VDL (+ 24V)) is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground region and the second ground region separated by the insulating portion. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which the current difference flowing through the wiring pattern connected by the first electronic component and the second electronic component is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground region and the second electronic component is It may be configured to be connected to the first ground region and the second ground region separated by the insulating portion, and with such a configuration, the wiring connected by the first electronic component and the second electronic component. Even when the current difference flowing through the pattern is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground region and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground region, so that an unintended current flows back through the ground. Can be prevented.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground region and the second ground region. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference is temporarily generated between the first ground region and the second ground region by the capacitor, it is possible to prevent the current from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region. ..

In the game control board of this embodiment, a first ground region is formed on one side (left side), a second ground region is formed on the other side (right side) facing one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component) is formed. ) Is mounted in the first ground region, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground region. According to such a configuration, since the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other even if a temporary potential difference occurs.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) in which a wiring pattern is not formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface. It is characterized by. According to such a configuration, the insulating property between the first ground region and the second ground region can be enhanced.

The game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Even if a non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on at least one of the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground region and the first ground region are formed. The insulation between the second ground regions can be enhanced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed in corresponding regions, respectively, and the mounting surface is formed. The non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) of the solder surface and the non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) of the solder surface are also formed in the corresponding regions. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference is temporarily generated from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface, it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other.

(Action effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is attached to the game machine in a state of being housed in the board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface, and the connectors are connected. The terminals (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to a wiring pattern formed on a solder surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface on the opposite side, not the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the portion where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is the wiring related to the advantage of the game (the signal for shifting the set value to a state where the set value can be changed, and the set value is changed. It is characterized by including a signal for inputting or outputting a signal for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display (wiring for inputting or outputting). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent cheating related to the advantage of the game.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) regarding the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portion of the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Since it is not formed, by displaying the information (connector number) regarding the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this portion, the portion where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface can be effectively used.

The game control board of this embodiment has a covering portion in which the board case covers the area around the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is as follows. It is characterized in that it is formed on a solder surface in a region covered with a covering portion. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is not formed on the mounting surface even in the peripheral portion of the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7), so that the connector is formed from the board case. It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the periphery of the portion where the (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the place where it is first connected to the electronic component. .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface by using a through hole for connecting to an electronic component.

(Action effect 5)
In the game control board of the present embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having a storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface, so that the game control is performed. The microcomputer for games can hold the stored contents of the storage means (RAM) by the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) can be used as the game control microcomputer. The wiring pattern (VBB) supplied to is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which the electronic parts are not mounted, so that the electronic parts are bypassed. Since it is not necessary to form the wiring pattern and the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is difficult to receive external noise, and it is possible to prevent the data stored in the storage means (RAM) from being damaged by the noise.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the game component (liquid crystal display, effect control board that controls the effect, etc.) side related to the game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise generated from the game component on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the other game device (other game machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from other gaming devices on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is solid in the area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area where the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is provided on the solder surface. It is characterized by the formation of a ground. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the beta land formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is higher than the wiring pattern (Vcc1 to 3) for supplying other power sources. It is characterized in that there are few points that intersect with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side as much as possible.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say.

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board that controls a game is described, but another board mounted on the game machine, for example, a board that controls an effect. The configuration according to the present invention may be applied to a gaming medium, a substrate that controls the addition of gaming value, a substrate that relays between the substrates, and the like.

The structure of the game control board in the second embodiment will be described. Similar to the first embodiment, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, electronic components are not mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in the second embodiment is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in the first embodiment, and here, a configuration different from the game control board of the first embodiment will be mainly described. ..

FIG. 38-18 is a diagram showing a mounting surface of the game control board in the first embodiment, and FIG. 38-19 is a diagram showing a solder surface of the game control board in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 38-18 and 38-19, the game control board is a rectangular printed circuit board composed of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating property. Consists of. Further, a plurality of through holes are formed on the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. Further, an insulating region and a ground region are formed in a region where the wiring pattern of the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board is not formed.

Similar to the game control board of the first embodiment, the game control board of the second embodiment also has an input circuit and an output circuit mounted therein. The input circuit and the output circuit are formed in a rectangular shape and have short sides. A concave notch is provided on one side, and a model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the component can be specified by the direction of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in the drawing and the printing direction of the model number is from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the notch is facing right in the drawing and the model number is printed. It is arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to specify whether these electronic components are an input circuit or an output circuit depending on the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. There is.

FIG. 38-20 is a diagram showing the configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 38-21 is a diagram from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the branched wiring pattern.

The game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns formed on the solder surface extending in the lateral direction, and as shown in FIGS. 38-20, the game control board of the game control board. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from the through hole to which the terminal of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side is connected. As shown in FIG. 38-21, the data bus and the input circuit and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern formed so as to branch to the mounting surface side through a through hole and extend in the vertical direction. ..

When the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit separated in the lateral direction are connected via the data bus, first, the terminal of the game control microcomputer extends in the lateral direction on the data bus on the solder surface. Branch to the mounting surface side wiring pattern that extends vertically toward the input circuit or output circuit through the through hole at the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, and is connected to the input circuit or output circuit. It becomes. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the input circuit and the output circuit separated in the lateral direction. Further, since the wiring pattern constituting the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which the electronic components are not mounted, it is not easily affected by the noise from the electronic components on the data bus, and further, the data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit Is connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through a through hole, so that the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened and is less susceptible to the influence of noise from electronic components during this period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38-22, the data bus is connected to the noise reduction circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than any input circuit and output circuit connected to the data bus. Therefore, the noise on the data bus is less likely to affect the game control microcomputer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38-20, connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the game control board in the vicinity of the upper side in the figure, and a data bus is provided. The constituent wiring pattern is formed in a region near the lower side in the drawing of the game control board, that is, a region near the other side facing the one side on which the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, the area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits is widely secured between the connectors CN10 to CN17 where signals are input and output from the electronic components outside the game control board and the data bus. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 38-20 and 38-21, the game control board has an input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for controlling the game (does not trigger a lottery). Input signals from the first input circuit that detects the input of sensors and switches (detection signals of sensors and switches, etc.) and the second input components that are more important than the first input components (detection signals of sensors and switches that trigger lottery, advantageous. The operation of moving parts such as solenoids and motors according to the progress of the game, based on the output data from the second input circuit that detects the input of the second input circuit (such as the detection signal that changes the set value that defines the degree) and the game control computer. The first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component, and the second output that displays various indicators, LEDs, etc. according to the progress of the game based on the output data from the game control microcomputer. The second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the parts, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, is mounted on the game control board, and the payout rate when the game is played for a certain period of time, etc. A third output circuit that outputs an output signal to a performance indicator that displays performance is mounted.

Of these input circuits and output circuits, the first output circuit, the first output circuit, the second output circuit, and the third output circuit are connected to the data bus, and the transmission of input data and the transmission of output data are performed via the data bus. Is done.

As shown in FIGS. 38-20, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the solder surface branches to the mounting surface side through through holes at a plurality of points, and is vertically formed on the mounting surface. It is connected to a wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIG. 38-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position N in the figure is connected to the terminal of the third output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through holes at the positions O and P in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branches on the mounting surface, and some wiring patterns are external as they are. It is connected to the output terminal, and the remaining wiring pattern is once connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole at the position R in the figure, and is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole at the position S in the figure. It is connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in FIGS. 38-20 and 38-21, among the input circuits and output circuits connected by the shared data bus, the input circuit has a wiring pattern length to the game control microcomputer rather than the output circuit. It is connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used for controlling the game is less likely to be affected by noise or the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38-20 and 38-21, an output signal is output to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game among the plurality of output circuits connected by the shared data bus. The length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter in the first output circuit that outputs the game than in the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the data bus so that it becomes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like and affecting the operation of the movable portion according to the progress of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38-20 and 38-21, among a plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is other than the performance indicator. Data so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the display (second output component) that displays according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the bus. For this reason, it is difficult for the contents of the performance display to be illegally modified due to the placement of unauthorized parts.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38-21, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder surface side, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure corresponds to the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the external output terminal for outputting to. In this way, it is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side by using the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus formed on the solder surface through the through hole. Since the wiring pattern and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched into the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting to the external device, the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the external output terminal Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each of the wiring patterns connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern is simply formed.

The wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder surface side outputs an output signal to the second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. In addition to being connected to the terminals of the two output circuits, the wiring pattern is branched on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the external device according to the progress of the game. Well, even with such a configuration, in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side by utilizing the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus formed on the solder surface through the through hole. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device, it is connected to multiple output circuits. Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each wiring pattern, the wiring pattern is simply formed.

The second input circuit of the input circuits is not connected to the data bus, and the input data is directly transmitted to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in FIG. 38-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is once connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole at the position T in the figure, and is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side. It is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole at the position of, and is connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

In this way, the first input circuit that detects the input of the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for controlling the game, is the game control microcomputer via the data bus. On the other hand, the second input circuit that detects the input of the input signal from the second input component, which is more important than the first input component, is not connected to the data bus and is directly connected without going through the data bus. It is connected to a game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is a data bus on which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without going through it, the input data based on the important input signal is not affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit, and it is sent to the game control microcomputer. It will be transmitted.

(Action effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer is the game control microcomputer. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from It is possible to prevent the data from being affected by noise or the like.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit. However, the output circuit is an input circuit. It may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control computer is shorter than that of the game control computer. With such a configuration, the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer may be used. An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data based on an input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for controlling the game control computer to the game control computer. Since the output data is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the input circuit, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control computer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The output circuit is a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The first output circuit includes a second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game has the second output that displays according to the progress of the game. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the parts, the output data is affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the movement of the movable part from being affected according to the progress.

The game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit. With such a configuration, the game progresses. The second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays is from the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. However, since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that it is shortened, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise, etc., and affecting the display according to the progress of the game. can.

Further, as in the game control board of the first embodiment, the first ground region on which the low voltage component is mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and the high voltage component is mounted on the right side. When the two ground regions are formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game often belongs to the high voltage component. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the two ground regions and outputs an output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game, is often mounted in the first ground region because it belongs to the low voltage component. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting it in the region, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, in the second ground region, preventing the load from being applied to the second output circuit. can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. An electronic component is mounted only on the mounting surface, a data bus is formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus through the through hole is output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface. It is characterized in that it branches into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for performing and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal that outputs an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side by utilizing the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus formed on the solder surface through the through hole. Since the wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched into the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting to the external device, in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns. Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the solder surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be simply formed.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control computer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The first input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the first input component used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and the first input circuit used for controlling the game control microcomputer. 2 The second input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the input component to the game control computer, and the first output component and the second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control computer. The first output circuit, the second output circuit, and the first input circuit, the first output circuit, and the second output circuit are connected to the game control microcomputer via the data bus. The second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to a game control microcomputer without going through a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is for game control without going through the data bus in which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit. ..

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface opposite to the solder surface on which the data bus is formed through the through hole. It is supposed to be. According to such a configuration, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted in the vicinity of one side (upper side), and the data bus faces one side of the game control board. It is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side). With such a configuration, it is possible to secure an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit between the connector (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the board area can be effectively utilized. ..

The game control board of this embodiment is equipped with a performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to other indicators. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display is more up to the microcomputer for game control than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the other display. Since the wiring pattern is short, it is possible to make it difficult to modify the display contents due to the placement of unauthorized parts.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the orientations of the components are different. With such a configuration, the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit can be easily grasped.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise reduction circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and the output circuit. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of Example 1 has the same effect as that described in Example 1. Further, the modified example exemplified for Example 1 can also be applied to Example 2.

The structure of the game control board in the third embodiment will be described. Similar to the first and second embodiments, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, electronic components are not mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. The game control board in the third embodiment is characterized by the structure of the electronic component and the through hole to be mounted, and here, the structure of the electronic component and the through hole will be described.

38-23 are perspective views showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in the third embodiment, (A) is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic component, and (B) is a perspective view. , Is a perspective view from below of a specific electronic component.

The specific electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and as shown in FIGS. 38-23 (A) and 38-23 (B), the specific electronic component is fixed to the substrate at the bottom of the specific electronic component. For the purpose, fixing terminals 1 and 2 that are not used for propagating signals and power of specific electronic components, and connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the board and used for propagating signals and power of specific electronic components. Is provided. Further, above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component, the model number of the specific electronic component is engraved or printed.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connecting terminal is illustrated as a specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be applied as the specific electronic component, and the key switch may be applied. An electronic component having only a connection terminal without a fixing terminal may be applied as a specific electronic component.

The through-holes provided on the game control board are usually composed of through-holes and specific through-holes. Normally, as shown in FIG. 38-24 (A), the through hole is subjected to copper plating, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner peripheral surface of the through hole, so that the through hole becomes a mounting surface and a solder surface. It is a through hole that conducts with. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38-24 (B), the specific through hole is a through hole in which the inner peripheral surface of the through hole is not copper-plated and the through hole does not conduct with the mounting surface and the solder surface. be.

Normally, when soldering to the through hole from the solder surface side, as shown in FIG. 38-24 (A), the through hole is copper-plated, so that the solder in the through hole reaches the mounting surface. Although it flows up, when soldering to a specific through hole from the solder surface side, as shown in FIG. 38-24 (B), the inside of the through hole is not copper-plated, so that the inside of the through hole is filled. The solder does not flow up and the solder does not reach the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 into the specific through hole, inserting the connection terminal into the normal through hole, and soldering from the soldering surface side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted into the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, so that the solder does not reach the mounting surface. Therefore, when soldering, the soldering is a specific electron. It is possible to prevent problems such as the model number printed or engraved above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by solder because it rises too much toward the mounting surface on which the component is mounted.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by solder, it may not be found even if the part is replaced illegally, and if the model number is hidden in the type test, the component configuration cannot be specified and the test cannot be passed. There is a risk that you will not be able to receive the solder, or you may not be allowed to install it in the game store because you cannot confirm the model number when installing it in the game store. By fixing with, such a problem can be prevented.

On the other hand, since the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for propagating signals and electric power of specific electronic components, a problem arises even if the electrical connection is weakened when soldering through a specific through hole. Never. On the other hand, the connection terminal is usually inserted into a through hole and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, so that the solder reaches the mounting surface to ensure electrical connection.

(Action effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the plurality of electronic components are mounted. A terminal is inserted through a through hole that penetrates the surface and the solder surface, and the through hole and the terminal are fixed by soldering, and a specific through hole is formed in which a specific electronic component is fixed among a plurality of electronic components. The specific through hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface does not conduct, and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered from the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through hole is soldered because the mounting surface and the solder surface do not conduct with each other and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered from the solder surface. At that time, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and causing a malfunction.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered. According to such a configuration, since it is the terminal for fixing the specific electronic component (fixing terminals 1 and 2) that is soldered to the specific through hole, the solder reaches the mounting surface. By not doing so, there is no problem even if the electrical connection is weakened.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into a specific through hole and soldered to the specific through hole. A terminal (connection terminal) that propagates the signal or power of the component may be inserted and soldered. According to such a configuration, the solder rises too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short-circuiting of terminals that propagate signals and power of specific electronic components with other terminals.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or engraved) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and hiding the model number of the specific electronic component.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the third embodiment, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configurations as those of Examples 1 and 2 have the same effects as those described in Examples 1 and 2. Further, the modified examples exemplified for Examples 1 and 2 can also be applied to Example 3.

(Invention of Feature 053SG)
As described above, the feature unit 053SG includes the inventions shown below. That is, conventionally, as described in JP-A-2016-93428, for example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine is generally provided with a substrate on which an electronic device is mounted. A board of this type has been proposed in which data is input / output between a control means such as a CPU and another electronic device using one data bus. In this type of substrate, there are various problems regarding the design of the wiring pattern. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine in which the wiring pattern of the substrate is suitably formed, the gaming machine of (1) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
The control means (microcomputer for game control) inputs input data based on input signals from the control means (microcomputer for game control) and electronic parts (input parts) used for controlling the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control) are mounted. , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (microcomputer for game control) is shorter than that of the output circuit.
According to this feature, an input circuit that transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component used for controlling the control means to the control means outputs to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means. Since the input data is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the output circuit that outputs the signal, it is possible to prevent the input data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine of (2) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1).
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface) and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine of (3) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1) or (2).
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern branched to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface (solder surface) on which the data bus is formed through a through hole. It is a feature.
According to this feature, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine of (4) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3).
On the board (game control board), connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted in the vicinity of one side (upper side), and the data bus is the board (game). The control board) is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side) facing the one side.
According to this feature, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector and the data bus, so that the board area can be effectively utilized.

The gaming machine of (5) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4).
A performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine is mounted on the substrate (game control board).
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is a control means (game control) rather than an output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to another display. It is characterized by being connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the (microcomputer) is shortened.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern to the control means than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to other indicators, which is an illegal component. It is possible to make it difficult to improperly modify the display contents due to the arrangement of the above.

The gaming machine of (6) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5).
The input circuit and the output circuit are characterized in that they are mounted on the board so that the orientations of the components are different.
According to this feature, the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit can be easily grasped.

The gaming machine of (7) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6).
The data bus is characterized in that it is connected to a noise reduction circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The gaming machine of (8) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
The control means (microcomputer for game control) inputs input data based on input signals from the control means (microcomputer for game control) and electronic parts (input parts) used for controlling the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control) are mounted. , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The output circuit outputs to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A second electronic component (second electronic component) that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal and the control means (game control microcomputer). Includes a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to (2 output components).
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (microcomputer for game control) is shorter than that of the second output circuit (second output circuit). It is characterized by being done.
According to this feature, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game becomes the second electronic component that displays according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is affected by noise etc. and can move according to the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the operation of the part from being affected.

The gaming machine of (9) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
The control means (microcomputer for game control) inputs input data based on input signals from the control means (microcomputer for game control) and electronic parts (input parts) used for controlling the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control) are mounted. , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
In the board (game control board), electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and the data bus is connected from the data bus through a through hole. The first wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern of the first surface (mounting surface) on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game. It is characterized by branching into a second wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal) for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device.
According to this feature, the first surface side is used to output according to the progress of the game by using the wiring pattern of the first surface connected from the data bus formed on the second surface through the through hole. Since the wiring pattern and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched into the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, they are formed on the second surface to be branched into the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern respectively. Since it is not necessary to branch from the generated data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be simply formed.

The gaming machine of (10) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
The control means (microcomputer for game control) inputs input data based on input signals from the control means (microcomputer for game control) and electronic parts (input parts) used for controlling the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control) are mounted. , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
A first input for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer). Input data based on input signals from the circuit (first input circuit) and the second electronic component (second input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is used for the control means (game control). A third electronic component (first output component, second output) based on the second input circuit (second input circuit) transmitted to the (microcomputer) and the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). Includes an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a component).
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus.
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is characterized in that it is connected to the control means (microcomputer for game control) without going through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without going through the data bus to which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the control means without being affected by the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit.

The gaming machine of (11) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
The control means (microcomputer for game control) inputs input data based on input signals from the control means (microcomputer for game control) and electronic parts (input parts) used for controlling the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control) are mounted. , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The output circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (microcomputer for game control) is shorter than that of the input circuit.
According to this feature, an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the input circuit transmitted to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine of (12) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
The control means (microcomputer for game control) inputs input data based on input signals from the control means (microcomputer for game control) and electronic parts (input parts) used for controlling the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control) are mounted. , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The output circuit outputs to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A second electronic component (second electronic component) that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal and the control means (game control microcomputer). Includes a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to (2 output components).
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (microcomputer for game control) is shorter than that of the first output circuit (first output circuit). It is characterized by being done.
According to this feature, the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second electronic component that displays according to the progress of the game becomes the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the first output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is affected by noise etc. and is displayed according to the progress of the game. Can be prevented from affecting the.

In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is inside the gaming machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given according to the prize are added, while the number of game balls used for the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified, and the variable display result is derived from the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the game machine capable of playing a game may be at least a machine that plays a game, and may be a general game machine as well as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 11 Main board 12 Directional control board 200 Dispensing device 202 1st induction passage forming part 201 Ball tank forming part 203 1st passage forming body 210 Terminal board 220 Cover body 271A to 271H Hole Part 314,324,334 Cover part 340 Ball stop member N1 ～ 6,11 ～ 16 Thread member 75SG001 Pachinko game machine 300 1st production unit 301 Base member 302 Cover member 303 LED board 331 Decorative pattern 400 2nd production unit 401 Base member 402 Cover member 403 LED board 420 Decorative part 600 3rd effect unit 800 4th effect unit 801 Base member 802 Cover member 803 LED board

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can play games,
A storage unit that can store game media,
A payout unit that can pay out game media,
A guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the payout portion.
The first screw drop limiting portion provided on the upper side of the guide passage forming portion,
A second screw drop limiting portion provided on the upper side of the guide passage forming portion,
Game frame and
Equipped with
The storage portion is arranged on the upper surface side of the predetermined portion of the game frame, and is arranged in close proximity to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that the screw member does not enter between the storage portion and the upper surface of the predetermined portion. ,
In the first screw drop limiting portion, the game medium dropped on the first screw drop limiting portion does not stay, and the screw member dropped on the first screw drop limiting portion falls to the induction passage forming portion. It is configured so that it can stay on the first screw drop limiting part without
In the second screw drop limiting portion, the game medium dropped on the second screw drop limiting portion does not stay, and the screw member dropped on the second screw drop limiting portion falls to the induction passage forming portion. It is configured so that it can stay on the second screw drop limiting part without
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images